人教新课标必修1 Unit 1 Friendship 课件+教案+测试+听力+视频动画全单元备课包

Unit 1 Friendship
Period 1 A sample lesson plan for reading
(ANNE’S BEST FRIEND)
Introduction
In this period, after the warming up, students will first be guided to answer questions about “friends” and “friendship”. Then they will be helped to read a narration （记叙文）entitled Anne’s best friend. It’s a story about a Jewish girl named Anne, who made her diary her best friend. Examples of “Warming Up” designs are presented in this book for teachers’ reference. Computer and overhead projector may be used to aid the teaching and learning.
Objectives
To help students learn to express attitudes, agreement & disagreement and certainty
To help students learn to read the text and learn to write diaries in English
To help students better understand “friendship”
To help students learn to understand and use some important words and expressions
To help students identify examples of Direct Speech & Indirect Speech (I): statements and questions in the text
Focus
Words
upset, ignore, calm, concern, settle, suffer, recover, pack
Expressions
add up, calm down, have got to, be concerned about, go through, set down, a series of, on purpose, in order to, at dusk, face to facer, no longer/ not …any longer, suffer from, get/ be tired of, pack (sth.) up, get along with, fall in love, join in
Patterns
“I don’t want to set down a series of facts in a diary as most people do,” said Anne. →Anne said that she didn’t want to set down a series of facts in a diary as most people do.
I stayed awake on purpose until half past eleven…
…it was the first time in a year and a half that I’d seen the night face to face…
Aids
Multimedia facilities, tape-recorder, photos, diagrams
Procedure
1. Warming up
⑴ Warming up by defining friendship
Hello, everyone. I’m so glad to be your teacher of English. I’d like to make friends with you, to build up a close friendship with you. Today we shall take Unit 1. The topic of this unit is Friendship. What do you think friendship is?
Yeah, there are many explanations about friendship. However, friendship is a relationship that can’t be restricted（限制）by definition（定义）. It can only be experienced. True friendship can exist between any two souls, be it between people or animals. It can happen at any moment, to anyone. Even to lifeless things, like a diary, a ball, a friendship can happen.
Then what is your opinion about friendship?
Do you think that friendship is important to our life? Why?
⑵Warming up by learning to solve problems
Nice to meet you, class. We shall be friends from now on. For everybody needs friends. But being a good friend can sometimes be hard work. Learning how to solve problems in a friendship can make you a better friend and a happier person. Discuss the situation below and try to solve the problems wisely.
Common problems among teenagers
Solution
Some of the common problems include forgetting friends’ birthday, not keeping promises, letting out friends’ secrets and so on.
Maybe we can have a heart-to-heart talk with our friends to ask for forgiveness.
Situation 1: Friends get angry with each other when they try to talk about something difficult.
Try to understand your friend/ Try to talk about the problem in a different way.
Situation 2: Friends don’t know how to apologize
Start by telling each other that you are sorry. A simple apology is often enough and is a good starting point.
Situation 3: Some friends don’t know how to keep secrets.
Keep your secrets to yourself
Tips on being a good friend
Treat your friends the way you want to be treated. Keep secrets that are told to you.
Pay attention when your friend is talking. Keep your promises. Share things with your friend. Tell your friend the truth. Stick up for your friend.
⑶Warming up by doing a survey
Good morning, class. I am your teacher of English. Glad to be here with you. Today we shall take Unit 1 Friendship.
To be frankly, I’d like very much to keep a close friendship with you, my dear students, in the following years. How about you then? Ok, thanks. I do hope to be your good teacher as well as your helpful friend (良师益友).
Now please do the survey on page one. Add up your score according to the scoring sheet on page 8. You don’t have to tell your results. You can just keep it a secret.
For reference
Scoring sheet for the survey on page 1
1 A1 B3 C2 2 A1 B2 C3 3 A1 B2 C3
4 A3 B2 C1 5 A0 B3 C0

2. Pre-reading by talking and sharing
Work in groups of four. Tell your group mates how you reflect on these questions.
Why do you need friends? Make a list of reasons why friends are important to you.
What do you think a good friend should be like? List what a good friend should do and share the list with your partners.
Does a friend always have to be a person? What else can be a friend?
Do you think a diary can become your friend? Why or why not?
Instructions: The teacher can give each group one of these questions above to talk about. Then let the class share their ideas. It’s better to stimulate the students to challenge their classmates’ opinions about these questions.
Possible answers
Q1: Reasons I need friends:
to cope with stressful situations in life
to share my worries and secrets in my inner world
to show my concern for other people
to let other people share my happiness
to unfold to other people the secrets in my heart (to name but few.)
Q2: A good friend should:
tell me the truth (honest)
be good to me (friendly)
be willing to consider or accept others’ ideas or opinions (open-minded)
be willing to help others (generous or helpful)
be good-tempered
think about what others need and try to help them (caring)
be loyal to their responsibility (responsible)
not easily upset (easy-going)
be out-going (like to meet and talk to new people)
be tolerant (allow other people to have different opinions or do something in a different way)
be selfless (to name but few)
Q3: What else can be a friend?
Answers can be various. (omitted)
Q4: Students’ answers may vary but must include a reason.
Yes. I think it can be, because I can set down how I feel every day in my diary, and let other people read it to share my feelings some time later. Above all, it feels good to write down my thoughts and feeling on paper when I am sad or lonely.
3. Reading and summarising
It’s time to read the text on page 2 by skimming and summarise the main idea of each paragraph in one sentence.
Summary of the text
Main idea of Para. 1
Anne Frank made her diary her best friend.
Main idea of Para. 2
Anne’s family was Jewish so they had to hide or they would be caught by the German Nazis.
Main idea of Para. 3
Anne hadn’t been able to be outdoors for so long that she’d grown so crazy about everything to do with nature.
Main idea of Para. 4
One evening, Anne stayed awake until half past eleven in order to have a look at the moon.
Main idea of Para. 5
Anne was only able to look at nature through dirty curtains.
4. Reading and drawing
Read the text once more to make a diagram of it.
5. Reading and underlining
Next you are to read the text again and underline all the useful expressions or collocations in the passage. Then you are to make sentences of your own with each of them.
Copy the expressions into your notebook after class as homework.
Useful expressions
laugh at…, hide away, set down…in a diary, in the hiding place, grow crazy about…, a deep blue sky, keep…spellbound, stay awake, on purpose, have a good look at…, give light, at dusk, hold…in one’s power, see…face to face, look at…through…, no pleasure doing…
6. Reading and studying
Read the text one more time to find all the “direct speech and indirect speech” sentences. Look into their structures and try to make as many similar sentences as you can.
She said, “I don’t want to set down a series of facts in a diary as most people do,…”
→ She said (that) she didn’t want to set down a series of facts in a diary as most people do,…
→She said (that) she wanted to make her diary her best friend.
…
7. Reading and filling
To test and strengthen your understanding of the text, please do the following two exercises.
Read and fill in the blank with one suitable word.
Anne Frank wanted a 1 _____ whom she could tell everything to. She found 2 _____ a friend. Her name was Kitty. 3 _____ that was her diary.
Being Jewish Anne’s family 4 _____away to avoid being caught by the German 5 _____. During that time Anne wrote a lot 6 _____diaries. In her Thursday 15, June, 1944 diary, 7 _____us about her wondering. She 8_____ it was because she hadn’t been able to be 9 _____for so long that she’d grown so crazy about 10 _____ to do with nature.
For example, she 11 _____ stayed awake purposefully so that she could 12 _____good look at the moon. But when the 13 _____came out, she didn’t open the window, 14 _____the moon light was too strong. Another 15 _____, she remained upstairs one evening until the 16 _____was shunt. She was held by the 17 _____, rainy evening, by the wind and the 18_____ clouds. She was terrified seeing 19_____ night face to face.
(Keys: 1 friend 2 such 3 And 4 hid 5 Nazis 6 of 7 told 8 if 9 outdoors 10 everything 11 once 12 have 13 moon 14 for 15 time 16 window 17 dark 18 thundering 19 the )
Work out the text-related word and structure questions.
1. Next listen to_____ she felt after having been made monitor of the class.
2. I want to _____ my child Little Dog.
3. He was lonely, so he _____ her computer her best friend.
4. My mother and her mother hid _____ for nearly seven years before the war was ended.
5. If you want to be a great writer, you should never _____ down a series of events _____ most writers do.
6. I wonder _____ it’s _____ I haven’t been able to make a good score for so long _____ I’ve grown so crazy about everything to do with English.
7. I can well remember _____ there was a time_____ money and fame could never have _____ me spellbound.
8. But _____ the stars gave far too little light, I didn’t _____ open a window.
9. I didn’t go to school _____ the examinations had to be taken.
10. The school work, the homework, the examinations _____ me entirely in their _____.
(Keys: 1. how 2. call 3. made 4. away 5. set, as 6. if, because, that 7. that, when, kept 8. as 9. until 10. held, power )
8. Closing down by discussing
Work in groups of four. Discuss the ideas put forward in the reading passage. It does not matter whether you agree or disagree. What is important is that you should have a reason for what you say. Also you can put forward your own ideas, either criticising the text or using it as a support:
★What would you do if your family were going to be killed just because they did something the Emperor did not like?
★ Where would you plan to hide?
★ How would you arrange to get food given to you every day?
What would you do to pass the time?
Unit 1 Friendship
Period 2 A sample lesson plan for Learning about Language
(Direct & Indirect Speech<Ⅰ> statements & questions)
Introduction
In this period students will be helped by the teacher first to discover useful words and expressions, and then to discover and use useful structures: Direct & Indirect Speech (Ⅰ) statements & questions.
Objectives
To help students understand and use direct and indirect speech in statements and questions
To help students learn to use some useful words and expressions
Procedures
1. Warming up by reading aloud
Reading and reading aloud are the two very important things to do while learning English. So, to begin with, you are to read the text on page 2 aloud to the tape. Let’s see who read aloud with the best pronunciation and intonation.
2. Discovering words and expressions
Turn to page 4 and do Exercises 1, 2 and 3. Then make a check on your answers.
3. Learning about grammar
⑴Direct speech
In direct speech, the original speaker's exact words are given and are indicated by quotation marks.
★ “I don’t know what to do,” said Dean.
In some grammar books, ‘said Dean’ is referred to as a reporting clause. “I don't know what to do,” is referred to as the reported clause.
⑵Indirect speech
In indirect speech, the exact meaning of the speaker’s words is given, but the exact words are not directly quoted.
★ Dean said that he didn’t know what to do.
To convert direct speech into indirect speech:
If the main verb is past tense, present tense verbs in ‘that clause’ must also be changed to past tense.
Dean said that he didn’t know what to do.
First and second person pronouns must be changed to third person pronouns.
Dean said that he didn’t know what to do.
(The word ‘that’ can often be left out: Dean said he didn’t know what to do.)
⑶Indirect questions
The same rules apply to indirect questions as to indirect statements. The difference is that a ‘wh- clause’ is used instead of a ‘that clause’.
Direct question: “Did Marama’s horse win a prize?” Owen asked.
Indirect questions: Owen asked whether (or if) Marama’s horse had won a prize.
Direct question: “Why won’t you marry me?” asked Donald.
Indirect question: Donald asked her why she wouldn’t marry him.
In telling a story or recounting events, a speaker using direct speech has all the resources of intonation to produce a lively account. Because indirect speech is always speech reported by someone else, the account is more reserved and restrained.
“What shall we do?” asked Bev.
“Don’t worry, Bev,” said Duncan, “I’ve got a plan.”
Bev asked Duncan what they should do. He told her not to worry and that he had got a plan.
The ability to change direct speech into indirect speech is a useful skill for those engaged in taking the minutes of a meeting or reporting on events.
Direct speech: “First of all, I would like to thank everybody who helped with the fair. The results were very good, and we will now be able to buy two more computers.”
Indirect speech: The principal said that he would like to thank everybody who had helped with the fair. He announced that the results were very good and that the school would now be able to buy two more computers.
4. Discovering useful structures
Now let’s go to page 5 to do the three exercises in order to consolidate our studies of the direct speech and indirect speech.
5. Closing down by taking a quiz
高考单选题中的“交际用语”
33.－I’m sorry I’m late. I got held up in the traffic on my way here. －_____ . （2006辽宁）
A. Don’t be late next time B. You should be blamed
C. It doesn’t matter, I’m also late D. Never mind. Come and sit down.
21.— What a beautiful picture you’ve drawn! (2006四川) — _____
A. Not at all. B. Thank you. C. You’re great. D. I’m proud of you.
34.—I wonder if I could possibly use your car for tonight? — _____ . I’m not using it anyhow. (2006全国I)
A. Sure, go ahead B. I don’t know C. Yes, indeed D.I don’t care
25.—Excuse me, can you tell me where the nearest bank is, please?
—_____ Oh yes! It’s past the post office, next to a big market. (2006全国I)
A. Mm, let me think. B. Oh, I beg your pardon?
C. You’re welcome. D. What do you mean?
34.—Do you mind my smoking her? — _____ (2006四川)
A. No, thanks. B. No. Good idea. C. Yes, please. D. Yes. Better not.
27．—It’s been raining for a whole week. I think it’ll get fine soon. (2006安徽）
—_____ . We are getting into the rainy season now．
A．Yes, it will B．Of course not C．It’s possible D．It’s hard to say
23．—How are you getting on with your cleaning? Do you need my help?
—_____ , but I think I’m all right．(2006安徽）
A．No, thanks B．That’s OK C．You are helpful D．That’s very kind of you
6. —Will you be able to finish your report today? —_____ . (2006全国II）
A. I like it B. I hope so C. I’ll do so D. I’d love it
11. —I’m terribly sorry that I made your table cloth dirty. —___________. (2006陕西）
A. Never mind B. Don’t mention it C. That’s right D. Sorry
Keys: D B A A D D D B A
压缩包中的资料：人教新课标必修1 课件+教案+测试+听力+视频动画全单元备课包 Unit5Unit5教案M1U5doc 人教新课标必修1 课件+教案+测试+听力+视频动画全单元备课包 Unit5Unit5教案Unit 5 Nelson Mandela-a modern hero单元概述doc 人教新课标必修1 课件+教案+测试+听力+视频动画全单元备课包 Unit5Unit5教案Unit 5doc 人教新课标必修1 课件+教案+测试+听力+视频动画全单元备课包 Unit5Unit5教案Unit5 Nelson Mandela--period1教案doc 人教新课标必修1 课件+教案+测试+听力+视频动画全单元备课包 Unit5Unit5教案Unit5 Nelson Mandela--period2教案doc 人教新课标必修1 课件+教案+测试+听力+视频动画全单元备课包 Unit5Unit5教案Unit5 Nelson Mandela--period3教案doc
Part 3 Teaching Assessment
第三部分 教学测评
I. Structure and vocabulary.
1. This is really an exciting match. _____ the game?
A. Who do you think will win B. Whom do you think will win
C. Do you think who will win D. Do you think whom will win
2. The Love Detector is _____ lie-detection software developed by Nemesis Co Ltd. of Israel.
(04杭州质检)
A. used as B. based on C. produced by D. fixed for
3. When the old man _____ to walk back to his house, the sun _____ itself behind the mountain.
（2005湖北）
A. started; had already hidden B. had started; had already hidden
C. had started; was hiding D. was starting; hid
4. You must stop now. _____ has been said.
A. Too many B. Many too C. Too much D. Much too
5. _____ earn enough money to buy a new car, he worked day and night.
A. In order that B. So that C. In order to D. So as to
6. John Smith, a successful businessman, has a___ car. （2004辽宁）
A．large German white B．large white German
C．white large German D．German large white
7. ___ was a time ___ women had no rights to vote.
A. There; when B. There; that C. It; when D. It; that
8. It was ___ back home after the experiment.（2004湖北）
A. not until midnight did he go B. until midnight that he didn’t go
C. not until midnight that he went D. until midnight when he didn’t go
9. The teacher spoke very slowly ____ the students could understand everything he was saying.
A. in order to B. so as to C. so that D. such that
10. —Shall we walk home?
—_____.I’m not wasting my time walking home.
I’m going to go by bus B. All right C. That’s a good idea D. Yes, let’s go
II. Fill in the blanks.
My family and I ___1__ for for two years during World War Ⅱ. I haven’t been able to be ____2_ for so long that I’ve grown so ____3_ everything to do with ___4_. __5__ have a good look at the moon, I stayed awake __6__ until half past eleven one evening. I was so glad to see a deep blue sky and it’s the first time in two years that I’d seen the night__7__….
III. Translate sentences into English.
1.有的人爱跟别人交谈，有的人却很害羞。
_____________________________________________________________________
2.跟别人交谈最简单的办法是找一些共同的东西。
_____________________________________________________________________
3.如果你知道他们讨论的话题，不妨加入到他们的谈话中。
_____________________________________________________________________
4.一旦你开始跟一个人交谈，那跟别的人交谈就容易了。
_____________________________________________________________________
5.选一个和你有共同兴趣的人，一旦你和他做了朋友，他的朋友也将会和你交谈。
_____________________________________________________________________
Keys: I. 1-5 ABBCC 6-10 BACCA ) II. 1.hid away 2. outdoors 3. crazy about 4. nature 5. in order to 6. on purpose 7. face to face III. 1. Some people like talking with others, while some people are shy. 2. The easiest way to start talking to people is to find something you have in common. 3. Join in their discussion if you know something about the subject they are discussing. 4. Once you start talking to one person, it will get easier to talk to others. 5. Find one person you share interest with, and once you become friends with him, his friends will start talking to you too.) 请你试着把以上五句话连起来读一遍——你能感觉出它们是围绕什么话题展开的吗？请你添加恰当的连词,把它们组成一篇短文，根据行文需要，可适当扩展。
A selected English passage for recitation英文精选背诵短文
Everyone needs friends
I think everyone needs friends. A friend is just like a soft wind, or rather a beautiful beam of sunshine. To be exact, he can give you many things you want. When you are happy, you can share your happiness with your friends; when you are not happy, your friends will also can to help you.
Your friends may be of many different kinds. Some of them may play happily with you; some others may have a pleasant talk to you, and of course you may talk to some of them hear to hear. We can’t say which kind of friends we need most, as each kind is necessary.
If one lives without friends, I can’t imagine his life in the world. And if one has good friends, even only one, I think he may be the luckiest one in the world. (145 words)
Unit 1 Friendship
第一部分
About the topic and the structures
单元话题和结构
本单元的话题是Friendship/友谊。友谊是人与人之间长久相处建立起来的情谊。
单元阅读短文的主人公Anne与她的diary/日记长久相处，建立起来深厚的情谊，这是为什么呢？
贯穿于本单元的句法项目是“运用直接引语和间接引语表达态度、同意/不同意、确定性概念”。
本单元还要求学生学习写作“建议信”。
单元课时划分上与课本保持一致，即“阅读课、知识课、运用课三课时/三课型划分”。但在实际教学过程中，我们建议教师依据学生基础、教学条件、学校安排的因素，对课本、对教学设计重新划分课时、裁剪、拼接使用我们提供的材料，以便“物尽所用”，达到最佳教学效果。教师也可以按照我们提出的“实际教学过程课时划分建议”进行教学。
Period 1
Reading
阅读课
Warming Up “热身”的目的是为阅读在一定程度上作好话题、词汇和结构的准备，激发学生相关的背景知识和学习兴趣。对此我们提供了“讲故事”、“解决问题”和“测评”三种不同的“热身”设计供教师选用。实际操作中还需要教师动用诸如板书、投影等辅助手段，以达到最佳教学效果。
Pre-reading 部分要求学生“看、听、猜、说”，口头回答、书面罗列，以挖掘和呈现自己的“朋友观”、“友谊观”，为其后的阅读做心理的铺垫和准备。
Reading 是篇记叙文，记叙了二战期间Anne 把日记当成好朋友，通过日记记事、叙事以抒发情感的动人故事。教师可以依照我们提供的“表格”、“结构图”阅读程序和“填空”、“词汇/结构”练习，引导学生从形式和内容两方面阅读文章，提高对友谊、朋友、战争和人生的认识，同时为下一节知识课“运用直接引语和间接引语表达态度、同意/不同意、确定性概念”作好铺垫。
Period 2
Learning about language
知识课
Learning about language 首先要求学生利用录音机朗读课文，强化学生对本单元重点词汇、短语、结构和话题的掌握；然后要求学生完成课本第4页提供的“词法”练习。接下来我们罗列了详尽的“运用直接引语和间接引语表达态度、同意/不同意、确定性概念”教学资料，教师可以酌情使用。学生完成课本第5页的句法练习之后，时间许可的话，可以让学生尝试我们提供的“高考经典题回放”。尽早接触高考原题可以打消他们对高考的恐惧感，增强他们的自信心。
Period 3
Using language
运用课
Using language 首先完成课本第6、7页的教学内容，即围绕一封信，让学生用英语进行读、听、写活动。在“问卷调查设计”和“控制性作文”阶段，我们提供了相关范例和范文，以帮助学生活用本单元学到的词汇、短语、结构和话题。在控制性娱乐写作活动中，我们建议在学生写作过程中，教师也动笔写，给学生以启迪和信心。
实际教学过程课时划分建议
Period 1
将Warming Up、 Pre-reading、Reading和Comprehending整合在一起上一节“阅读课”。
Period 2
将Learning about language 和Workbook中的 USING WORDS AND EXPRESSIONS、USING STRUCTURES 整合在一起上一节“语言知识课”。
Period 3
将Using language 设计为一节包括听说读写单项技能或组合技能训练的“综合技能课（一）”。
Period 4
将Workbook 的READING AND LISTENING和TALKING整合在一起上一节“听说课”。
Period 5
将Workbook 的LISTENING TASK、READING AND WRITING TASK和 SPEAKING TASK整合为一节“综合技能课（二）”。
第二部分
教学资源说明
Section 1
Background
背景
围绕单元话题“Friendship”，我们提供了几则语言规范、短小精干的趣味性材料。这些材料既可以作为教师教学参考材料为教师所用，也可以直接或改写、重组后作为课堂内外的拓展性阅读材料呈现给学生。
Section 2
Explanation
解析
重点针对“阅读课型”中的课文难句，我们不仅提供了详尽的，就句论句的解析和翻译，而且还以解析的焦点话题为线索，进行了一定的归纳、辨析和总结，以帮助教师更好地实施“语言形式”的教学。
Section 3
Vocabulary
词汇
按照课本单元词汇表顺序，我们重点提供动词、短语搭配的讲解。所提供的例句，经典、地道、实用、易懂，完全可以直接用于教学。
第三部分
教学测评说明
围绕单元词法、句法项目，我们提供了长短不一的“单元教学测评”，并备有参考答案供教师使用。有些测评题目直接源于历年高考试卷，更具有说服力和实用性。
Unit 1 Friendship
Section 2 Notes to difficult sentences
1. …or just can’t understand what you are going through.或者根本就不知道你在经历怎样的煎熬。
go through有三层意思：1. 通过；穿过；透过（pass through; pierce; penetrate），如：It took us a whole week to go through one of the great forests. 我们化了整整一星期才穿过一大森林。The rain has gone through my coat. 雨水湿透了我的上衣。2. 受苦（suffer），如：She went through a lot of suffering when she was ill. 她生病时受了不少罪。3. 仔细检查；搜查（look inside something carefully; search something），如：The policeman went through the thief's pockets. 警察搜查了小偷的衣袋。课文中go through 是第二层意思。
2. …I stayed awake on purpose until half past eleven…我故意保持清醒直到11点半……
文中stay是半系动词，away是形容词作表语。半系动词后可用名词、不定式、分词和形容词等作表语，这类词有： 表示感官的系动词：look, sound, taste , smell, feel，seem, appear (这些词后只能用形容词作表语) ；表示变化的系动词：become, get, turn, grow, make, come, go, fall, run；表示依旧的系动词：remain, keep, stay, continue, stand, rest, like, hold；可用名词作表语的系动词：be, become, make, fall, prove, remain, turn (该词后的单数名词前不可用冠词。如：He turned teacher. )
3. But as the moon gave far too much light, 但是由于月亮发出的光芒太耀眼……
句中far是副词，作状语修饰too much表示程度。如：The new law doesn’t go far enough．这条新的法律还不够严厉。You’ve gone too far！你太过分了！（你太侮辱人了/架子太大了/太蛮横无礼了等。）表示程度时的副词far，应与比较级或与too/so+原级形式连用：She swims far better than I do．她游泳要比我游得好多了。He drinks far too much．他酒喝得太多了。
4. …it was the first time in a year and a half that I’d seen the night face to face… ……那是一年半以来我第一次面对面直视黑幕……
句中it作形式主语。英语中不定式、动名词、主语从句在做主语时主语往往显得很长，使整个句子看上去有点头重脚轻，这样就借助“it”来做形式上的主语，而把真正的主语移到句子后边去，使全句看上去平稳一些。“it”没有实际的意义。如： It is fun for her to study, but it is difficult to study and work at the same time.对于她来 说学习是有趣的，可是要边工作边学习对她来说是困难的。It is necessary for them to get an electrician to do the work for them.对他们来说请一位电工来为他们做这项工作是必要的。It will be no good learning without practice. 学习而不实践是不好的。It is no use talking to him about it.和他谈这事没用。It is possible that they're finished the bridge.他们完成这座桥是可能的。It is important that we should learn from each other and help each other.我们应当互相学习，互相帮助，这是很重要的。
Unit 1 Friendship
Section 3 Words and expressions
survey
n. 纵览,视察,测量
v. 审视,视察,通盘考虑,调查
1. We stood on the top of the mountain and surveyed the countryside. 我们站在山顶上，眺望乡村。
2. A quick survey of the street showed that no one was about. 扫视街道, 空无一人。
3. Of the five hundred householders surveyed, 40% had dishwashers.
在接受调查的五百家住户中, 40% 有洗碗机。
add
v. 增加
1. He added some wood to increase the fire. 他加了一些木柴，使火旺些。
2. If you add 4 to 5, you get 9. 四加五等于九。
3. Add up all the money I owe you. 把我应付你的钱都加在一起。
upset
a. 烦乱的,不高兴
v. 颠覆,推翻,扰乱,使心烦意乱,使不舒服
1. I'm always upset when I don't get any mail. 我接不到任何邮件时总是心烦意乱。
2. He has an upset stomach. 他胃不舒服。
3. The news quite upset him. 这消息使他心烦意乱。
ignore
v. 不顾,不理,忽视
1. You've been ignoring me. 你一直不把我放在眼里。
2. I said hello to her, but she ignored me completely! 我向她打招呼, 可她根本不理我!
3. I can't ignore his rudeness any longer. 他粗暴无礼, 我再也不能不闻不问了。
calm
n. 平稳,风平浪静
a. 平静的,冷静的
v. 平静下来,镇静
1. It was a beautiful morning, calm and serene. 那是一个宁静、明媚的早晨。
2. You should keep calm even in face of danger. 即使面临危险，你也应当保持镇静。
3. Have a brandy it'll help to calm you (down). 来点儿白兰地--能使你静下来。
calm down
vt. 平静下来(镇定下来)
1. Calm down, you're getting terribly wrought up over nothing.
镇定下来吧，你这样紧张激动，完全是莫名其妙。
2. His rage was soon calmed down by the rustic peace. 乡村的宁静很快就使他的怒气平静下来。
3. I told myself to calm down. 我告诫自己要冷静下来。
have got to
conj. 不得不(必须)
1. You may not like him, but you have got to admire his persistence.
你可以不喜欢他，但你不得不佩服他那种坚忍不拔的精神。
2. I couldn't have got to the meeting on time -- unless I had caught an earlier train.
我不可能及时赶到会场，除非我赶上了较找的一班火车。
3. Jim broke away from his friends, saying "I have got to hit the books."
吉姆离开他的朋友时，说道：“我得回去做功课了。”
concern
n. 关心,关系, 关切的事,忧虑
v. 涉及,与...有关,影响;使关心
1. How much money I earn is none of your concern. 我挣多少钱与你无关。
2. These problems concern all of us. 这些问题影响到我们每一个人。
3. This restaurant is a family concern. 这家饭店是由一家人经营的。
be concerned about
vt. 关心(挂念)
1. It is reassuring to be enquired after when you're ill. It shows your friends haven't stopped being concerned about you.
如果能询问一下你是何时生病的我们也就放心了。因为你的朋友一直在关心你。
2. The government's claim to be concerned about unemployment is sheer hypocrisy.
政府声称对失业表示关注纯属做做姿态。
3. Please don't be concerned about me. 请不要为我担心。
cheat
n. 骗子,欺骗行为
v. 欺骗,作弊
1. His father was cheated of his land. 他的父亲被人骗走了地产。
2. He never cheats to pass examination. 他考试从不作弊。
3. He was cheated (out) of his rightful inheritance. 他依法应得的遗产被人骗走了.
reason
n. 理由,原因,理智,理性
v. 说服,推论,下判断
1. She can reason very clearly. 她能很清晰地思考。
2. Copernicus reasoned that the earth revolved around the sun. 哥白尼论证了地球绕着太阳转。
3. We have reason to believe that he was murdered. 我们有理由相信他是被谋杀的。
list
n. 目录,名单,明细表
v. 列出,列于表上,记入名单内
1. He wrote down his name on the list. 他将他的名字写在清单上。
2. He listed all the things he had to do. 他把自己必须做的事列成表。
3. The books are listed alphabetically. 这些书是按字母顺序编入目录的。
share
n. 部份,股份,分担
v. 共享,共有,分配
1. If you want a share of the pay, you'll have to do your fair share of the work.
要是你想得到一份报酬，你就必须做好你该分担的那一份工作。
2. She's got all her money in stocks and shares. 她所有的钱都投放到股票里去了。
3. Children should be taught to share their toys. 应该教育孩子们分享玩具。
go through
a. 通过
1. I've gone through the elbows of my sweater. 我的毛衣的肘部都磨破了。
2. He's amazingly cheerful considering all that he's been through.
鉴于他经历过的种种遭遇，他的乐天达观令人惊叹。
3. She decided not to go through with (ie not to have) the abortion. 她决定不做流产.
hide away
包庇
藏起...
1. It licked me to think they had been hid away for such a long time.
我真不明白它们怎么会被隐藏了这么久。
set down
1太阳落山
2. 申斥(搭乘,触地)飞机着陆
1. The bus stopped to set down an old lady. 公共汽车停下来让一个老太太下车。
2. I'll set you down on the corner of your street. 我在你说的那条街的拐角处停下来让你下车。
3. Why don't you set your ideas down on paper? 你怎么不把你的想法写在纸上呢?
a series of
一系列,一连串
1. The theory is based on a series of wrong assumptions. 这一理论是以一系列错误的设想为依据的。
2. The overthrow of that lawful regime has resulted in a series of riot.
合法政权的被推翻导致一连串的暴乱。
3. A series of mischance happened. 一连串不幸的事发生了。
on purpose
故意,有意
1. He knocked the old man down on purpose. 他故意把那个老人撞倒。
2. She seems to do these things on purpose. 她似乎是有意地做这些事。
3. `Did he break it accidentally?' `No, on purpose.' ｀他是无意中损坏的吗?＇｀不, 是故意的。＇
in order to
为了
1. In order to maintain physical well being, a person should eat wholesome food and get sufficient exercise.
为了维持身体健康，一个人应该吃有益健康的食品，并经常锻炼身体。
2. In order to earn enough money, he worked late into the night. 为了赚到足够的钱, 他工作到深夜。
3. We started early in order to arrive before dark. 为了在天黑前到达,我们很早就动身了。
dare
n. 挑战,挑动
v. 敢,胆敢
1. How dare you say such a thing? 你怎敢说出这样的话？
2. I dare say you are right. 我认为你是对的。
3. He dared me to jump over the river. 他激我跳过河。
thunder
n. 雷电,雷声
v. 打雷,大声喊出
1. My little dog always hides under the bed when it thunders. 我的小狗一听到打雷就藏到床底下。
2. We could hear the thunder of distant guns. 我们可以听到远处炮声隆隆。
3. "Get out!" he thundered. “滚出去！”他大声吼到。
face to face
面对面地
1. His ambition was to meet his favourite pop star face to face.
他心向往之的是要面对面地见见他心目中的流行曲歌星。
2. The burglar turned the corner and found himself face to face with a policeman.
盗贼一拐弯面对面地碰上个警察。
3. The two rival politicians came/were brought face to face in a TV interview.
那两个对立的政客面对面地一起接受电视访问。
trust
n. 信任,信托
vi. 信任
vt. 委托,相信
名词:truster 动词过去式:trusted 过去分词:trusted 现在分词:trusting 第三人称单数:trusts
1. My husband trusts me and I don't intend to break that trust. 我的丈夫信任我，所以我不想失去这种信任。
2. Can you trust his account of what happened? 你能相信他对发生的事情所做的报告吗？
3. In his will he created trusts for his children. 他在遗嘱里为子女安排好了信托财产。
suffer
v. 遭受,经验,忍受
1. They suffered huge losses in the financial crisis. 他们在经济危机时遭受了巨大的损失。
2. She couldn't suffer criticism. 她受不了批评。
3. How can you suffer such insolence? 你怎么能容忍这种蛮横的态度？
get along with
vt. 友好相处(和睦相处,取得进展)
1. We should let bygones be bygones and try to get along with each other.
我们应当本着既往不咎的原则重新合伙。
2. He is the last person that I'll get along with. 他是我最不愿与之相处的人。
3. Do you get along with your boss?/Do you and your boss get along? 你跟老板合得来吗?
gossip
n. 闲聊,随笔
v. 说闲话
1. There has been much gossip in political circles. 政界里有许多流言蜚语。
2. I never talk about gossip. 我从不传播流言蜚语。
3. She loves to gossip to her neighbors. 她喜欢议论邻居们的是非长短。
fall in love
vt. 陷入爱河(爱上,喜爱)
1. It is natural that he should fall in love with such a beautiful girl. 他爱上那位美丽的姑娘是很自然的事。
2. It's my karma always to fall in love with brunettes.
我爱上的总是深褐色头发、 浅黑色皮肤的白种女子, 这是我的缘分.
3. You say you don't believe in marriage, but I bet you sing a different song when you finally fall in love.
你说你认为结婚是无谓的, 但我肯定你最终爱上一个人的时候你就不这么说了.
quiz
n. 小考,随堂测验,恶作剧
v. 简单测验,恶作剧
1. We will have a quiz tomorrow morning. 我们明天早晨进行一个小测验。
2. She quizzed him all night about the people he'd seen. 她整夜盘问他都见到谁了。
3. Match your skill against the experts in this quiz. 在这一测验中你与专家较量一下技巧吧。
communicate
v. 沟通,传达,交流
1. The door communicates with my room. 这门和我的房间相通。
2. I can't communicate with them; the radio doesn't work. 我无法和他们联系，无线电坏了。
3. He has communicated his wishes to me. 他已经把他的愿望告诉了我。
join in
参加,加入
1. We want to join in the masquerade. 我们想去参加化装舞会。
2. Can I join in (the game)? 我参加（这个游戏）行吗?
3. I will join in the project, heart and hand. 我会满腔热情地参加这项工程。
join，join in，join
to join的基本词义是“加入某个党派或社会团体，从而成为该党派或团体的一员”。例：
When did they join the conservation organization？他们是什么时候参加环保组织的？
The prodigy joined the International Association of Poets，Playwrights，Editors，Essayists and Novelists（PEN）when he was only fourteen years old．这位天才在十四岁时便成为国际笔会会员。
join in的意思是“参加某项运动或活动”，例如参加讨论、游行、罢工等。例：
More than ten thousand workers have joined in this strike．有一万多名工人参加了此次罢工。
All of us will join in the celebration of the victory of World War Ⅱ．我们全都参加这次庆祝世界二次大战胜利的活动。
There were many extracurricular activities，but Peter never joined in．尽管有很多课外活动，但彼德从不参加。
join to的意思是“和…接触”、“与…相连”。例：
Our house is joined to Mr．So's．我们的房子和苏先生的房子相连。
请注意，join之后如接 oneself再加to，就表示“参加”、“加入”的意思。如：
To my surprise，Mr．Li joined himself to the opposite party last month．令我惊奇的是，上个月李先生竟然参加了反对党。
Unit 1 Friendship
1.Teaching aims and demands
类别
课程标准要求掌握的项目
话题
Friends and friendship; interpersonal relationships
词汇
add point upset ignore calm concern loose cheat reason list share feeling Netherlands German outdoors crazy nature purpose dare thunder entirely power according trust indoors suffer teenager advice questionnaire quiz situation editor communicate habit
add up calm down have got to be concerned about walk the dog go through hide away set down a series of on purpose
in order to face to face according to get along with fall in love
join in
功能
态度(attitudes)
Are you afraid that---?
I’ve grown so crazy about---
I didn’t dare---
2. 同意和不同意（agreement and disagreement）
I agree. I think so. Exactly.
I don’t agree. I don’t think so. I’m afraid not.
3.肯定程度（certainty）
That’s correct. Of course not.
语法
直接引语和间接引语(1): 陈述句和疑问句
陈述句
“I don’t want to set down a series of facts in a diary.” Said Anne.
-----Anne said that she didn’t want to set down a series of facts in a diary.
一般疑问句
He asked, “Are you leaving tonight?”
---He asked us whether we were leaving that night.
特殊疑问句
“When did you go to bed last night?” father said to Anne.
--- Father asked Anne when she went to bed the night before.
Suggested teaching notes
1). Analyses of the teaching contents
This unit is about friendship, and nearly all the teaching materials center on it.
Warming up---The questionnaire leads students to think and talk about
friendship, get to know the problems between friends
and seek solutions, which makes preparations for the
further teaching in topics, background and vocabulary.
Pre-reading---The questions prompt students to think critically about
friends and friendship in reality, alerting them to the fact
that besides people, a diary can be a friend, too.
Reading--- The diary by the Jewish girl Anne gave a glimpse of her life
during her family’s shelter in Amsterdam from the German
Nazis’ killing in world war 2. she treats the diary as her best friend, and in it reveals her longing for a normal life and close contact with nature, which helps her get through the days.
Comprehending---It helps students further understand the text by doing
multiple choices, questions and answers, and
matching.
Learning about language---It teaches the important expressions and
structures and grammar: direct and indirect
speeches.
Using language---The two letters, listening, questionnaire design, letter
writing and fun writing prepares students to further
talk about friendship, especially the problems with
misunderstanding, and unfriendliness, thus
strengthening students’ abilities to practice
language, discover, and solve problems.
Summing up---It summarizes the whole contents of this unit from the
aspects of topics, vocabulary and grammar.
Learning tip--- This part encourages students to form the habit of writing
a diary.
Integrating skills--- The text introduces the way Hawaiians express
friendship, to get students to realize the cultural
differences in the values of friendship in addition
its importance in all cultures.
2) Making of the teaching plan
This unit centers on friends and friendship, exploring different types of friendship
with particular attention to that one can develop with oneself, i.e., the comfort and
support one seeks from an imaginary friend. Students are expected to come to be truly
aware of the qualities and conducts that make a good friend, display and develop the
ability to cope with misunderstanding, conflicts and problems related to friendship,
and give advice on it. The concept that even an ordinary thing can be a friend should
break down the traditional belief in the interpersonal nature of friendship. Also, the
comparison of similarities dissimilarities in friendship comprehension between the
East and the West leads students to know better the values of friendship in Westerns’
eyes. All in all, this unit promises to unveil the true essence of friendship and helps
students to lead a more friendly and harmonious life. Thus, based on the theme,
contents and teaching objectives, the whole teaching procedures can fall into five
periods as follows:
Period 1
Warming up and speaking
Period 2
Reading
Period 3
Grammar
Period 4
Integrating skills (WB)
Period 5
Using language
3. Teaching plans for each period
Period 1 Warming-up and Speaking
1. Teaching objectives:
1) Target language
I (don’t) think…… I (don’t) think so. I (don’t) agree.
I believe…… That’s correct. In my opinion, ……
2) Ability goals
Describe your friends in English
Figure out the problems between friends and then find different ways to solve the problems.
Learning ability goals
To encourage students to think and talk about friends and friendship by using some phrases and structures.
To learn to solve problems that may occur between friends.
c. To cultivate the students to form the good habit of learning English in Senior Middle School.
2. Teaching important points:
Use the given adjectives and sentence structures to describe one of your friends.
Learn to evaluate friends and friendship.
3. Teaching difficult points:
Work together with partners and describe one of your good friends.
Discuss with partners and find out ways to solve the problems.
4. Teaching methods
Task-based teaching and learning
Cooperative learning
Discussion
5. Teaching aids:
CAI
6. Teaching procedures and ways:
Step 1 Lead-in and Warming-up
Before the lesson, the teacher can arouse the students’ interests by showing a video of Auld Lang Syne .
At the beginning of the first class, we can get the students to talk about their summer holidays. The students can talk freely as they like.
How did you spend your summer holidays? How did you feel? What did you do in your summer holidays? What did you do in your spare time?
What do you think of our new school? Do you like it? Could you say something about it?
Do you like making friends? How do get in touch with your friends? Do you have many friends? Where are they now? Do you have any old friends in our school? Have you made any new friends in our class?
Step 2 Think it over
1. Give a brief description of one of your friends. The following phrases and structures may be helpful:
His/Her name is ……
He /She is …… years old.
He /She likes …… and dislikes ……
He /She enjoys …… and hates……
He /She is very kind/friendly/……
When /Where we got to know each other.
2. What types of friendship do you have? Please tick them out. Then fill in the blanks.
girl friends boy friends pen friends
long -distance friends friends of the same age
e-friends (friends over the internet) friends across generations
unusual friends like animals, books……
1).______ is /are most important to you.
2). You spend most of your free time with ____.
3). You will share your secrets with _____.
4). When in trouble, you will first turn to _____.
Step 3 Make a survey
1. List some qualities of a good friend or your ideal friend. Have the students get into groups of four to find out what each has listed.
Tell your partner your standards of good friends by using the following structure:
I think a good friend should (not) be……
In my opinion, a good friend is someone who……
Have a member of each group report on what their lists have in common and list them on the board.
Ask the class whether or not they agree with all the qualities listed.
Then have the students do the survey in the textbook.
Have the students score their survey according to the scoring sheet on page 8.
The teacher ask some students how many points they got for the survey and assess their values of friendship:
★ 4~7 points: You are not a good friend. You either neglect your friend’s needs or just do what he/she wants you to do. You should think more about what a good friend needs to do.
★ 8~12 points: You are a good friend but you sometimes let your friendship become too important, or you fail to show enough concern for your friend’s needs and feelings. Try to strike a balance between your friend’s needs and your own responsibilities.
★ 13+ points: You are an excellent friend who recognizes that to be a good friend you need balance your needs and your friend’s. Well done.
(You may also show your students the results above and let themselves self-reflect upon their own values of friendship)
Step 4 Talking and sharing( work in pairs)
1. If your best friend does something wrong, what will you do?
Try to use the following phrases:
I (don’t) think…… I (don’t) think so.
I (don’t) agree. I believe……
That’s correct. In my opinion, ……
What to do
?reasons
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
2. What is a friend?
A British newspaper once offered a prize for the best definition(定义) of a friend. If you were the editor, choose the best one from the following entries(条目), and explain why.
One who understands my silence.
A friend in need is a friend indeed.
Friends are just the people who share your happiness and sorrow. When you look at your watch at 4 am, but still know you can call them and wake them up, and they’ll still want to talk to you ,that’s friendship. To have a friend, you need to be a good friend.
Step 5 Group work (output)
The teacher can give each group one of these questions below to talk about. Then let the class share their ideas. It’s better to stimulate the students to express their own opinions about these questions.
Do you think it is a good idea to borrow money from your friend?
Why and Why not?
2. What factors may cause the breakdown of a good friendship?
3. What can be your unusual friend besides human beings? And why?
Step 6 Homework
Write down a short passage about your ideas /the factors/your unusual friends.
Prepare for the new lesson.
Period 2 Reading “Anne’s Best Friend”
1. Teaching objectives:
1) To develop the students’ reading ability, learn to use some reading strategies such as guessing, key sentences, skimming and so on;
2). To get the students to realize the importance of friends and friendship, and to tell true friends from false friends;
3). To grasp some useful words and expressions in this passage, such as on purpose, be crazy about etc.;
4). To learn the writing style of this passage.
2. Teaching method: Task-based teaching
3). Teaching procedure:
Step 1.Pre-reading
1. Please enjoy three pieces of music and find out what they are about.
2 .Why do you think friends are important to you?
3. What do you think a good friend should be like? List the good qualities a good friend should have .
4. Have you ever considered making friends with animals, plants or even an object? Why or why not?
Step 2.Reading
1. Try to guess what Anne’s friend is and what the passage is about by reading the title and having a quick at the pictures in this passage without reading it.
2. Skimming the first two paragraphs to confirm your guessing.
1) What was Anne’s best friend? Why did she make friends with it?
2) Did she have any other true friends then? Why?
3) What is the difference between Anne’s diary and those of most people?
4) Do you keep a diary? What do you think most people set down in their diaries?
5) We are going to read one of Anne’s diaries .but before reading ,can you tell me what the diary is about with the help of one key sentence in the 2nd paragraph?
3. Reading of Anne’s diary
How she felt in the hiding place
Two examples to show her feelings then
Step 3.Post-reading
1.What would you miss most if you went into hiding like Anne and her family? Give your reasons.
2.Group work
Work in groups to decide what you would do if your family were going to be killed just because they did something the Emperor did not like.
Where would you plan to hide? How would you arrange to get food given to you every day?
What would you do to pass the time?
------
3. Discovering useful words and expressions
Complete the following sentences, using words and expressions from Reading
1) She has grown _______ about computer games.
2) Was it an accident or did David do it on _______?
3) From the beginning ,Paul made it clear that he would be ______ (完全地)in control.
4) He used to work _______ even in the middle of winter.
5) Just the _______ of more food made her feel sick.
6) You had better have a _________ talk with him.
7) Born in a poor family, the manager _________ lots of hardships in his childhood.
8) A diary is often kept to ________ what happens in people’s daily lives.
Step 4.Talking about friends and friendship
1.There are many proverbs about friends and friendship. Choose the one you agree with and explain why, then choose one you disagree with and explain why.
A friend in need is a friend indeed.
Friends are like wine; the older, the better.
A friend to all is a friend to none.
The same man cannot be both friend and flatterer(阿谀奉承者).
False friends are worse than open enemies.
Walking with a friend in the dark is better than walking alone in the light.
2. We have talked about friends and friendship today, can you write one or two sentences to express your understanding of friends and friendship.
Step 5.Homework:
1. Interview a high school student, a businessman, a police officer and a housewife to find out their opinions about friends and friendship. Write a report to share it with the whole class.
2. Describe one of your best friends following the writing style of this passage.
Ending: Let’s sing this song about friends together
Period 3 Grammar
1．Teaching objectives
Learn to use direct speech and indirect speech
2. Teaching important point
Summarize the rules of Direct Speech and Indirect Speech.
3. Teaching difficult point
Learn about the special cases in which the tenses shouldn’t be changed.
4. Teaching methods
Discussing, summarizing and practicing.

5. Teaching procedures
Step1 Lead in
T: In the last lesson, we learned Anne Frank’s story. She is telling her stories to two of her friends—you and Tom. Tom has something wrong with his ears, so you have to repeat Anne’s sentences, using indirect speech. Sometimes you explain Tom’s sentences to Anne.
“I have to stay in the hiding place.” said Anne. →
Anne said she had to stay in the hiding place.
“Do you feel sad when you are not able to go outdoors?” Tom asked Anne. →
Tom asked Anne if/whether she felt sad when she was not able to go outdoors.
“I don’t want to set down a series of facts in a diary,” said Anne.→
Anne said that she didn’t want to set down a series of facts in a diary.
“What do you call your diary?” Tom asked. →
Tom asked what she called her diary.
Ss go on this topic by themselves.
Step2 Grammar
T: Now let’s look at these sentences again. If we want to change Direct Speech into Indirect Speech, what should be changed?
Ss discuss by themselves.
Ss: sentence structures, tenses, pronouns, adverbials of time and place and verbs should be changed.
T: Quite right. Look at the form on the screen. These are the rules.
直接引语变成间接引语时，要注意以下几点：人称变化、时态变化、宾语从句要用陈述句语序。
1.直接引语是陈述句，变成间接引语时，由连词that 引导。例如：
　　She said, "I am very happy to help you."→
　　She said that she was very happy to help you.
2. 直接引语是一般/选择疑问句，变成间接引语时，由连词whether或if 引导。例如：
　　He asked me, "Do you like playing football?"→
　　He asked me if/whether I liked playing football.
注意：大多数情况下，if和whether 可以互换，但后有or not,或在动词不定式前，或放在介词后作连接词时，一般只用whether。例如：
　　She asked me whether he could do it or not.
　　
3. 直接引语是特殊疑问句，变成间接引语时，由相应的疑问词who, whom, whose, how, when, why, where 等引导。例如：
　　My sister asked me, "How do you like the film?"→
　　My sister asked me how I liked the film.
4. 直接引语是祈使句，变成间接引语时，把动词原形变成动词不定式，并在动词不定式前加tell, ask, order 等的宾语。例如：
　　The captain ordered, "Be quiet."→
　　The captain ordered us to be quiet.
　　注意：此种情况的否定句，在动词不定式前加not。
　　My teacher asked me, "Don't laugh."→
　　My teacher asked me not to laugh.
5. 一些注意事项
(1)间接引语一般要用陈述句的语序，即主、谓、宾的顺序。例如：
　　He asked Lucy, "Where did you go?"→
　　He asked Lucy where she went.
　　Tom said, "What do you want, Ann?"→
　　Tom asked Ann what she wanted.
(2)直接引语是客观事实、普遍真理等，变成间接引语时，时态不变。例如：
　　They told their son, "The earth goes round the sun."→
　　They told their son that the earth goes round the sun.
(3)直接引语变间接引语时， 指示代词、时间状语、地点状语等要作相应的变化。例如：
　　He said, "I haven't seen her today."→
　　He said that he hadn't seen her that day.
注意：如果转述时就在原来的地方，就在说话的当天，就不必改变指示代词、时间状语、地点状语等。
Direct Speech Indirect Speech
Present past
Past past and past perfect
Present perfect past perfect
Past perfect past perfect
Present continuous past continuous
Step3 practice
T: Turn to Page 5. Please change the following direct speech into indirect speech and indirect into direct.
“I’m going to hide from the Germans,” Anne said.
“I don’t know the address of my new home,” said Anne.
“I cannot ask my father because it is not safe to know,” she said.
“I had to pack up my things very quickly,” the girl said.
“Why did you choose your diary and old letters?” Dad asked her.
Mum asked her if/whether she was very hot with so many clothes on.
Margot asked her what else she had got.
Anne asked her father when they would go back home.
Anne asked her sister how she could see her friends.
Mother asked Anne why she had gone to bed so late the night before.
Step4 Correcting mistakes
T analyses the common mistakes Ss have made during the practice.
T: Now let’s look at the screen and pay attention to these sentences. Choose the right sentence and tell me why the other one is wrong.
Step5 A game
Play a guessing game “who is my secret friend?” One student comes to the front with his partner.
The rest students ask him questions while his partner changes them into indirect speech. In the end, the person who has guessed the right answer can come to the front to take the place of the first student .So the game goes on.
Suggested sentences:
Can your friend speak?
What does he/she wear today?
Is he/she tall or short?
What do you and your friend do in your free time?
Do you quarrel with each other?...
Step6 Homework
Do Exercise1 on Page 42. Here is another page of Anne’s diary. Read it through and then use indirect speech to retell the story.
Period 4 Integrating skills
“Friendship in Hawaii”
1. Teaching objectives:
To learn about ways of showing friendship in Hawaii and share their opinions on friendship. Because it is a lesson of integrating skills, Ss are also asked to write sentences on friendship.
2. Teaching procedures:
Step1 Lead-in
1. Talk about different ways of showing friendship of minority groups in China.
2. Compare Chinese ways of showing friendship with Western ways. And discuss why there is a big difference. Therefore, show the sentence: Every culture has its own ways to show friendship.
3. Ask students if they can think of any place in the world where Chinese and Western cultures live side by side. They may think of Hongkong, Macao, Singapore. And the teacher will add one more -------Hawaii.
Step2 Fast reading
1. It is said that Hawaii is a place where the East truly meets the west. Consider how people show their friendship in Hawaii.
Show a picture and find the information from the textbook. ( by giving “leis” to one another.)
Explain what is a “lei”.
2. Read fast and find out more ways to show friendship in Hawaii to fill in the form.
3. According to the form, ask them to consider what friendship is in Hawaiians.
Step 3 Careful reading
Read the 2nd paragraph carefully and ask “Why do many different peoples call Hawaii their home?”
( Hawaii is a place where people make one big community from many smaller communities. It means Hawaii has a rich cultural diversity.)
Step 4 Writing task
Show proverbs about friends and friendship. Explain them and ask Ss to choose some they agree with and some they disagree with and explain why.
Discuss with their partner and try to write some similar sentences to show their opinions on friendship.
Step 5 Homework
Surf the Internet to collect materials like poems, stories about friendship. And share them with your friends.
Period 5 Listening & Writing
1. Teaching objectives
To practise students’ listening ability.
To practise students’ writing skills of how to offer advice.
To improve students’ ability to help others solve problems.
2. Teaching procedure
(Analysis: Listening and writing are expansion of the topic of the text. Listening is about Lisa’s problem of making a friend with a boy. She asks Miss Wang for advice. Through listening and exercise, students learn how to give advice and the skill of giving advice. And also let them think about the problem of boy’s making friends with girls and girls with boys. And then design a task to ask students to give advice according to the different problems to practise their ability to solve the problems. All of these lay the foundation for the next task writing. In this way, students feel that they have information to put out. And writing makes for the improvement of students’ writing ability, strengthening their comprehension of friendship.)
Step 1 Lead-in
Do you remember what Ann’s best friend is?
Is it a man or a thing?
Have you seen the film Cast Away?
When Tom is alone on a deserted island, what does he make friends with? ( a volleyball)
Guess what my best friend is? (Say sth. about music, pets or plants.)
So you see a man can make friends with anyone and anything.
Then boys, would you like to make friends with girls? Girls, would you like to make friends with boys?
What kind of girl would you like to make friends with? And what kind of boy would you like to make friends with?
If you see a boy classmate makes a friend with a girl, will you say something about them behind?
(If no, say you are kind. If yes, say you are a gossiper.)
If you are that boy/girl, would you like to be gossiped about?
But here Lisa has such a problem. Read the letter. Lisa is asking you for help. What advice will you give? You are given 2 minutes to discuss in groups and then offer group’s opinions.
Step 2 Listening
Besides you Lisa also asks Miss Wang of Radio for Teenagers for help. What advice does Miss Wang give to Lisa? Let’s listen to what she says.
Listen for 3 times and do listening exercises.
Step 3 Post-listening
Do you think Miss Wang’s advice is helpful?
Now suppose you are editors of Radio for Teenagers, here are some problems for you to offer advice.
(Give each group a problem and ask them to write down their advice.)
I don’t have enough pocket money.
I’m not satisfied with my appearance.
My desk mate has lost a reference book, she/he thinks that I’m a thief.
I work hard but I hardly make progress.
I want to travel to WuZhen Town with my fiends this weekend, but my parents don’t allow me to go.
I don’t like the way Mr. Li teaches us English, so I’m not interested in English any longer.
My mother has just given birth to my little brother. I’m worried that the baby will rob me of my parents’ love and even everything.
I quarreled with my best friend 3 days ago. Up to now, we haven’t said a word to each other.
I’d like to be monitor, but at the same time I doubt whether I have such ability.
I’m often late for school. The teacher is so angry that he threatens that if I’m late again, I will be dismissed.
Step 4 Writing
Your advice is good and helpful. All of you are qualified editors. Now I have just received a letter from a lonely boy. Read the letter, what is his problem? What is your advice for him? Write a reply.
Step 5 Homework
Write a story about you and your friend.
Unit 1 Friendship
Teaching goals
*语言知识
to talk about friends and friendship, and interpersonal relationship
to practise expressing attitudes, agreement and disagreement, and certainty
to master some sentences about giving advice
to learn to use the Direct Speech and Indirect Speech(1): statements and questions
to learn about communication skills
*语言技能和学习策略
to develop listening skills by doing exercises in listening task
to develop speaking skills by finishing the speaking task and other activities like discussion and oral practice
to develop reading skills through the reading materials in this unit
to learn to write a letter of advice
*文化意识
to know about friend and the real meaning of friend
to learn how to get along with others
*情感态度
to arouse the interest in learning English
to learn to express their feeling of friends and friendship
Teaching key points:
how to improve students’ speaking and cooperating abilities
learn to use the Direct Speech and Indirect Speech(1):statements and questions
master some words and expressions
Teaching difficult points:
train the students’ speaking, listening, reading and writing abilities
how to improve students’ cooperating abilities
Teaching methods:
Student-focus approach and task-based approach
Learning methods:
Cooperative study
Teaching aids:
Computer
The First Period (Warming up &Speaking)
Teaching aims:
to know about different kinds of friendship
to learn some words of describing friend and friendship
to master some useful words and expressions
Teaching methods:
discussing
cooperative learning
Teaching materials: Warming up
Teaching procedures:
Step One: Leading-in
Free talk: Something about friend and friendship
Ask the Ss to describe one of their friends----their appearance, personality, hobbies, etc.
Qs: What’s your friend like?
What does he/she like to do in his/her spare time?
What personality does he/she have?
Step Two: Discussion
Writing the following statement on the blackboard
We all agree that to have a good friend , you need to be a good friend.
Ask the Ss:
What do you think of this statement and how can you be a good friend?
Let the Ss express their views
3. Have the Ss get into groups of four to list some qualities of a person they would like as a friend.
Ss may list: honest, friendly, open-minded, generous, helpful, patient, good-tempered, trustworthy, careful, full of love, caring, responsible, interesting, brave, easygoing, outgoing, warm-hearted, kind, selfness, tolerant, intelligent…
4. Have a member of each group report on what their lists have and list them on the blackboard
5. Ask the class whether or not they agree with all the qualities listed
Step Three: Doing the survey and explanation
Have the Ss do the survey in the textbook and let them work out their score.
Teacher explain each item
Question 1 deal with how thoughtful you are towards others. The scoring reflects your concern for others. So one point for A gets the lowest score because it is the most selfish response. B get the highest score because it show a concern for your friend as well as your wish to go to see a film. C gets a slightly lower score because although it shows you want to go with your friend ( because you change the plan), you do not help your friend.
Question 2 is concerned with fairness. A gets the lowest score because you are not giving your friend another chance to behave better this time. B gets a higher score because you let your friend borrow the camera again. This shows kindness and forgiveness or the trouble you had when it was returned broken. But you are not balancing his heeds against your own. That is why C gets the highest score. You are showing your friend that you will trust him/her with the camera again but this time you are giving him / her rules in case it gets broken.
Question 3 deals with your concern for others. A get the lowest score because you would put anything else that needed to be done aside and concentrate only on your friend. This is not responsible. You have things that you need to do. Of course your friend is important but not more important than you responsibilities. B gets a higher score because it shows some concern for your friend and some understanding that you have important things to do too. But it does not show any real interest in his / her problem. C get the highest score because it not only shows concern for your friend but a recognition that you have responsibilities too.
Question 4 is concerned with responsibilities to a friend. A provides the correct amount of responsibility to your friend. You recognize that it was your fault and will put it right and pay for the damage. So it gets the highest score. B provides some understanding that you are responsible. You put the situation right but you do not pay for the damage yourself. So it does not get the highest score. C gets the lowest score because you expect your friend to pay for your mistakes even though you were doing your friend a favour.
Question 5 is concerned with honesty. If you let your friend look at your paper or somebody else’s paper, you are helping them to cheat. That is not honest, so answers A and C get no marks. But it takes courage to tell your friend that they should have studied and that they cannot look at your paper. That is also the honest answer. So you get 6 points for B, which is more than any other in the quiz.
Step Four: Language points
Teacher explain language points with some slides
add v.
1) to put together with something else so as to increase the number, size, importance, etc. 增加，
添加
eg. Please add something to what I’ve said, John.
2) to join numbers, amount, etc so as to find the total
eg. Add up these figure for me, please.
常用结构：
add up / together sth. 把…加起来，合计
add sth. to sth. 把…加到/进
add to (=increase) 增加了…
add up to 合计，共计
add in 包括…，算进
pay to get it repaired 花钱让人去修理
upset adj. worred; annoyed 不安的；使心烦意乱的
v. cause to worry, to be sad, to be angry, not to be calm, etc. 使不安；使心烦意乱
eg. He was upset when he heard the news.
His cheating in the exam upset his teacher.
4．ignore vt. to pay no attention to sth. 忽视；对…不予理睬
eg. Ignore the child if he misbehaves and he’ll stop soon.
ignorant adj.无知的；不知的 ignorance n. 无知；愚昧
5. calm vt. to make sth./ sb. become quiet 使镇静；使平静
adj. not excited, nervous or upset 镇静的；沉着的
calm down 镇静；平静
calm down sb.=calm sb. Down 使某人镇静
sb. calm down(vi.) 某人平静下来
eg. The excited girl quickly calmed down.
He took a few deep breaths to calm himself down.
have got to do sth.(口语)=have to do sth. 不得不做某事；必须做某事
eg. Since you’re no longer a child now, you have got to make money to support the family.
*have got to在变疑问句或否定句时，不再另加助动词，而have to则须加助动词do.
have got to前不用情态动词，而have to前则可以。如：
eg. Have you got to writ an assignment for your teacher?
be concerned about / for : be worried about
eg. We’re all concerned about her safety.
cheat vt.
1) to act in a dishonest way in order to win 欺骗；作弊
eg. Any student caught cheating will have to leave the classroom.
2) to take from (someone) in a dishonest way 骗；骗取
eg. They cheated the old woman (out) of her money by making her sign a document she didn’t understand.
1) an act of cheating 作弊行为
2) one who cheats 骗子
Step Five: Speaking
Get the Ss to work in groups of 4.
Ask the Ss to use the questionnaire in Warming up as an example and discuss about designing questions.
Follow the steps in this part and start the discussion like this:
A: Now let us design a questionnaire to find out what kind of friend one is.
B: OK. First we must think of four questions and three possible answers to each question.
C: What about the first question? Have you got one in mind?
D: Suppose your friend has taken away your book by mistake. What will you do or say to him / her?
…
4. Teacher go around in the classroom and check their discussion.
Step Six: Assignments
1.Ask Ss to consider the following question;
What is / are the most important quality / qualities that a friend needs to have?
2. Prepare for Reading
The Second and Third Period
( reading and language points)
Teaching aims:
to know about the story of Anne’s Diary
to promote the Ss’ abilities of reading comprehension
to learn about the following words and expressions:
readon; list; go through; hide away; set down; a series of; outdoors; crazy; spellbound; on purpose; dare; happen to do sth.; It’s the first time that…
Teaching methods:
reading and discussion
cooperative learning and speaking
Teaching materials: Reading, Comprehending
Teaching procedures:
Step One: Leading-in
Ask their opinions on the question mentioned in the assignment of last period.
Step Two: Pre-reading
Let the Ss think about the questions in Pre-reading, and express their own views to the whole class.
Step Three: Reading
Ask the Ss to look at the pictures and the heading, guess what the text might be about.
Get the Ss to skim the passage and answer the following questions:
What’s Anne’s best friend?
What does her diary mainly talk about?
(1. Anne’s best friend is her diary. 2. It’s about Anne’s feeling of hiding away. She especially missed going outside and enjoying nature.
Let the Ss read the passage and discuss the following questions:
Imagine what it might be like if they had to stay in their bedroom for a whole year. You could not leave it even to go to the WC or get a cup of tea. How would they feel?
If you are only allowed to have five things with you in the hiding place because there is very little room, what would you choose?
Try to guess why the windows had to stay closed.
Guess the meanings of the word “crazy” and “spellbound” according to the context.
Step Four: Discussing the style
Ask the Ss:
What do you think is the purpose of this passage? Why did Anne write it?
Do you think it is successful? Do you understand Anne’s feelings?
What is Anne’s tone? In other words, is the author angry, sad, happy or thrilled?
What is Anne’s point of view? Do you agree with it? If so, why? If not, why not?
Step Five: Listen to the text and comprehend it
Step Six: Language points
1. go through
to examine carefully 仔细阅读或研究
eg. I went through the students’ papers last night.
to experience 经历；遭受或忍受
eg. You really don’t know what we went through while working on this project.
2. hide away
vi. to go somewhere where you hope you will not be seen or found 躲避；隐匿
hide away +地点
eg. The thief hid away in a friends’ house for several weeks after the robbery.
to put or keep sth. /sb. in a place where they / it can’t be seen or found 藏；隐蔽
hide away sth. / hide sth. away
eg. Why do you hide your thoughts away from me?
3. set down
write down 写下；记下
eg. I’ll set down the story as it was told to me.
put down 放下；搁下
set down sth. /set sth. down
eg. He set down a basket on the ground.
4. series n.（单复数同形）
a series of 一连串的；一系列的
5 .crazy adj.
mad, foolish 疯狂的；愚蠢的
It is crazy of sb. to do sth. = sb be crazy to do sth.
eg. It’s crazy to go out in such hot weather.
wildly excited; very interested 狂热的；着迷的
grow / be crazy about sb. / sth.
eg. The boys are crazy about the girl singer.
like crazy 发疯似的；拼命地
eg. He talked like crazy; I couldn’t understand what he said.
6. I wonder if it’s because I haven’tt been able to be outdoors for so long that ….
*I wonder if / whether…
eg. I wonder if you can help me?
*It’s because …
it is 后的表原因的从句中，只能用because来引导， 不能用since或as.
eg. Why did you go to school on foot?
It is because my bike had broken.
7. spellbind v. to hold the complete attention of 吸引人，迷人；使入迷
eg. The children watched spellbound as the magician took rabbits from his hat.
stay v. to continue to be in a particular state or situatioin
系动词，表是状态。后跟名词或形容词，不能用于被动语态和进行时态。
eg. He stayed single all his life.
10. on purpose
1) 故意地 （反义：by chance / accident）
eg. I think she lost the key on purpose.
2) on purpose to do sth. 为了要…而特地
eg. He went to town on purpose to sell one of his paintings.
far adv. “过于；…得多” ,表示程度，经常与too或形容词、副词的比较级连用。
eg. She speaks English far better than I.
This room is far too warm.
cf. very, much, far
dare 1) modal. v. 多用于否定句、疑问句、条件状语从句、whether (if)等名词性从句或有否定意义的句中，后接动词原形。没有人称和数的变化,其时态只有现在时和过去时。否定式在其后加not.
eg. How dare he say such a word!
If you dare do that again, you’ll be punished.
2) vt. 敢，胆敢。有人称、数和时态的变化。在否定句和疑问句中，dare后的to可保留也可省略。
eg. I wonder how he dare to day such words.
12．happen to do sth.
It so (just) happened that…
不能用于进行时态。
eg. I happened to be out when he came.
= It so happened that I was out when he came.
13．It’s the first time that…
eg. It is the first time that I have seen the sea.
Step Seven: Comprehending
Get the Ss to do the exercises in this part.
Step Eight: Consolidation
Listen to the text again to appreciate it.
Step Nine: Assignments
Read the key sentences in the text
do the exercises on Wb (Page 41-42)
The Fourth Period (Listening)
Teaching aims:
to train and develop listening skills by listening to the listening exercises in this unit
Teaching methods:
Listening and speaking
Teaching materials: listening parts on Page 6 and Page 41 and Page 43
Teaching procedures:
Step One: Revision
Check the answers to the homework
Step Two: Listening
Listen to the exercises on Page 6
Guess the words by listening to the tape and write them down
Step Three: Listening to the passage
Fill in the blanks on Page 41
Step Four: Speaking
Listen to the tape and discuss questions in groups of four, express your own views.
Step Five: Listening task
Discuss with the Ss whether they always do what their parents tell them.
Have the Ss listen to the passage.
Fill in the table
Work in pairs to give some advice to Anne
Step Six: Assignments
Do the exercises on Page 42 ( Ex 1,2)
Revise the Object Clause
The Fifth Period (Discovering Useful Structures)
Teaching aims:
Let the Ss use the Direct Speech and Indirect Speech
Teaching methods:
discovery learning
cooperative learning
Teaching materials: Page 5
Teaching procedures:
Step One: Revision
1. Check the homework with the Ss
2. Revise the Object clause
Exercise: Rewrite the following sentences.
I go to school by bike . ( He said…)
Will you forget to do your homework? (Mary asked him…)
When did you come here? (They asked me…)
What has he said? ( Do you know…)
Anne is watching TV now. ( Mother told me …)
Step Two: discovering useful structures
Present some sentences for Ss
My friend says, “ I will come here tomorrow?”
如果此时此地，你来转述，应该说：
My friend says she / he will come here tomorrow?
如果时间变了，地点不变，你来转述，应该说：
My friend said she / he would come here the next day.
如果地点变了， 时间还是今天，你来转述，应该说：
My friend sayd she / he will go there tomorrow.
如果时间地点都变了， 你来转述，应该说：
My friend said She / he would go there the next day.
如果由别人转述，时间地点都变了，应该说：
He/ She said he /she would go there the next day.
*使用直接引语和间接引语要注意具体语境。
2）“Do you go to the park yesterday?” He asked me.
He asked me if / whether I went to the park the day before.
3) Kate said to John, “What’s your favourite food?”
Kate asked John what his favourite food was.
Get the Ss to have a look at Part 1 in “Discovering useful structures” and sum up this grammar point.
人称、时态、指示代词、时间状语、地点状语等的变化。
Step Three: Practice
Do the first tow sentences in Part 2 as examples.
Check the answers together.
Step Four: Assignments
Wb, Page 42, 43 (Individual, Groups)
Prepare for Reading on Page 44
The Sixth Period ( Reading)
Teaching aims:
to learn about friendship in Hawaii
to promote the Ss’ abilities of reading comprehension
to learn about the following words and expressions:
way; the second important; It’s believed that…; in peace; those who …; etc.
Teaching methods:
reading and discussion
cooperative learning and speaking
Teaching methods: Reading (Page 44)
Teaching procedures:
Step One: Leading-in
Ask the Ss if they can think of any place in the world where Chinese and Western cultures live side by side.
( Hong Kong, Macao, Singapore, the Philippines, San Francisco, etc.)
Step Two: Reading
Get the Ss to read the passage and try to finish the table in Ex1.
Read the passage carefully again and discuss the questions in Ex2.
Report their discussion
Step Three: Listening to the text and comprehend it
Step Four: Language points
the way to do sth. / the way of doing sth.
the second most important
the second + adj.（最高级）
the third + adj. （最高级）
eg. The Yellow River is the second longest river in China.
China is the third largest country in the world.
to enjoy the land = in order to enjoy the land
eg. To make the w8th Olympic Games the game ever, Beijing will make several changes.
* to do和 in order to do可以置于句首、句末，而 so as to do只能置于句末。
Indeed, Hawaii is a place where ….small communities.
It’s believed that the islands can be a paradise ….
It’s believed that …= People believe that …
eg. It’s believed that they arrived more than 30,000 years ago.
in peace
… they are really talking about all those who live on the islands.
those who…=people who … “凡…的人”
eg. The teacher praised those who had done good deeds.
We find it our duty to help those who are in trouble.
Living in peace, Hawaiians has developed …
现在分词短语作原因状语，相当于 As they are living in peace.
Perhaps this is how most visitors will remember their new friendship.
Step Five: Listening to the text and enjoy it
The Seventh Period ( Speaking Task and Writing)
Teaching aims:
to develop Ss’ speaking ability and learn to express their own views
enable Ss to write a letter of advice
Teaching methods:
tasked-based learning
speaking
Teaching procedures:
Step One: Speaking task
Task One: Ex1 (Page 45)
Get the Ss to work in pairs, have them read the situations and choose one to discuss.
Ask the Ss to present their dialogue.
Task Two: Ex2 (Page 45-46)
Ask the Ss to look at the pictures.
Work in groups of four and talk about whether they are doing is cool or not.
Try to express their own views to the whole class.
Step Two: Writing
Task One: Ask the Ss to write a letter of advice
Get the S to read the letter on Page 7 and understand it.
Ask the Ss to work in pairs and talk about how to answer the letter.
Write the letter in reply down.
Task Two: Ask the Ss to write a passage about their opinions on friend and friendship
Read the proverbs carefully.
Write a passage to express their own opinions.
Step Three: Assignments
Fill in the form in Sum up (Page 8)
Fill in the form in Checking yourself (Page 47)
Unit 1 Friendship
教材分析
I．教学内容分析
“友谊”自古就是人们的永恒话题之一，本单元的中心话题就是“友谊”，该单元几乎所有的内容都是围绕这一中心话题展开的。
Warming up部分通过一个问卷调查的形式，让学生对于日常生活中朋友之间可能发生的真实问题以及如何解决这些问题有所了解。
Pre-reading部分设计了三个问题，一方面引导学生对“友谊”和“朋友”这两个概念进行思索；另一方面让学生知道友谊不仅仅存在于人与人之间，日记之类的东西也可以成为人们的朋友。
Reading节选了《安妮日记》的一部分，全部内容可分为四大部分：
谈论有关朋友的事情；
简单介绍安妮的一些情况；
为什么安妮把日记当作自己最好的朋友；
赏析部分《安妮日记》。
Comprehending部分主要是对课文的细节进行了解，共设计了4种形式的练习。第一部分是连句的形式；第二部分是回答问题的形式；第三、四部分是展开想象。
Learning about Language分两部分：
一是巩固文中的词汇，共设计了四个题型：
1. 对单词的英英解释；
2. 用第一题以及Warming up中的一些单词和短语完成短文；
3. 用Warming up和Reading词的正确形式完成句子；
二是学习语法知识—直接引语变间接引语，并进行操练。
Using Language集听、说、读、写于一体。通过读两封信、听一段对话、设计调查问卷、写信以及趣味写作，给学生提供了探索认识友谊的空间，如通过现实生活中被朋友误解、没有朋友等各种具体的问题，使学生对于友谊有了更进一步地理解。
Summing Up引导学生对本单元的词汇和语法等方面进行总结。
Learning Tip建议学生养成写日记的习惯。一是锻炼语言运用能力；二是可以在日记中表达自己的感情和思想。
II．教学重点和难点
1. 教学重点
(1) 本单元的生词和短语；
陈述句和疑问句的直接引语和间接引语；
对于个人的观点、态度的一些表达方式。
2. 教学难点
学会怎样描述朋友，怎样表达自己对于友谊的观点；
了解朋友不是仅限于人类，朋友的真正含义以及朋友的重要性；
怎样设计调查问卷。
III．教学计划
本单元分七课时：
第一课时：Warming up
第二课时：Pre-reading, Reading, Post-reading, Comprehending
第三课时：Language points and learning about language
第四课时：Grammar
第五课时：Using language
第六课时：Listening, Talking (Workbook)
第七课时：Reading task, Speaking task, Writing task (Workbook)
IV．教学步骤
Period 1 Warming up
Teaching Goals:
1. To arouse Ss’ interest in learning about friendship.
2. To develop Ss’ ability to speak out opinions on a certain topic with the help of the given information.
Teaching Procedures:
Step1. Leading-in
Purpose: To activate Ss and arouse them to speak out opinions about friends and friendship.

Show the pictures about SHE and basketball geniuses. Ask the students what they think of friendship. Nobody can go without friends. Since we ourselves are different from each other, we may prefer different kinds of friends.
Step2. Warming up
Purpose: To lead Ss to the topic of this unit through a quiz.
1. Pair work: Get Ss to ask each other the questions, and then ask them to present it before the class.
(1) What does your best friend look like?
(2). Have you made any friends through the Internet?
(3) What is/are the most important quality/qualities that a friend needs to have?
To get Ss to list some of the following words on the blackboard:
honest, friendly, open-minded, generous, helpful, patient, good-tempered, trustworthy, careful, full of love, caring, responsible, interesting, brave, easygoing, outgoing, warm-hearted, kind, selfless, tolerant, intelligent…
2. Individual work
Get Ss to open their books, turn to page 1 and do the survey in the textbook.
Work out the score on page 8 to see if he or she is a good friend or not.
3. Discussion
Do you think a good friend is important? Why or why not?
Step3. Language points
1．Add vt.增加；添加；补充说
vi. 加；加起来；增添
1）add up 合计，加起来
Add up your score and see how many points you can get.
将你所得的分说加起来，看看你能得到多少分
2） add to 增加
His illness added to the family’s trouble.
他的病给家里增加了负担。
3） add…..to 往…加…
Please don’t add the fuel to the flame.
不要火上浇油。
4） add up to 总共有，总计达
The students here add up to 1000.
这里的学生总共有1000名。
2．get sth. done :have sth. done
1）使…被做（一般找别人做）
Please get the blackboard cleaned.
请找人擦黑板。
2）遭遇过某种情况（一般指不好的事）
He got his left leg hurt yesterday.
他的左腿昨天摔断了。
3．should have done 本应该做某事而实际上没有做
You should have study hard last year.
你去年应该努力学习。
I missed the train. I should have got up earlier.
我错过了火车，我应该早点起来。
Should not have done 本不应该做某事而实际上却做了
You shouldn’t have told her this terrible news, for she has completely lost confidence in herself.
你本不应该告诉她这个可怕的消息的，因为
4． calm down 使平静，平静下来
The excited movie fans calmed down at last.
激动的影迷们最终平静下来。
Have a brandy-----it will calm you down.
喝杯白兰地－那会使你平静下来。
5． Concern 关系到，涉及
This concerns us deeply.
这件事和我们关系重大。
1） be concerned about (for) 关心，挂念
we are all concerned for her health.
我们都很关心她的健康。
Step 4. Homework
Preview Reading.

Periods 2 Pre-reading, Reading, Post-reading, Comprehending
Teaching Goals: 1. To get Ss to learn the story of Anne.
2. To enable Ss to learn from Anne’s story the importance of friends.
3. To instruct them to understand that not only human beings but also things like diaries can be their friends.
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1. Revision
1. Check up the homework
Revise what’s learned in Warming up by asking the following questions
(1) Why do you need a good friend?
(2) What should a good friend do for you?
Step 2. leading-in
It is known to all that friendship is very important and it is sad of a person to have no friend. Suppose you are in a very difficult situation in which it is impossible to make friends with others. How can you express yourself, your sadness or happiness, your loneliness and your horror?
Step 3. Reading
1. Read the text quickly and answer the question.
What’s Anne’s best friend?
2. Show some pictures that show Germans killed the Jews and get Ss to learn about Anne’s feelings.
3. Read the text again and join the correct parts of the sentences (P3).
4. Deal with some long and difficult sentences.
(1) Do you want a friend whom you could tell everything to, like your deepest feelings and thoughts?
你是不是想有一位无话不谈、推心置腹的朋友呢？
whom you could tell everything to 是定语从句，修饰friend。此处的like相当于 such as。
(2) I wonder if it’s because I haven’t been able to be outdoors for so long that I’ve grown so crazy about everything to do with nature.
我不知道这是不是因为我长久无法出门的缘故而使我变得对一切与大自然有关的事物都无比热爱。
I wonder if是个固定句型，意思是：“我想知道是否……”. it是形式主语，指代真正的主语that I’ve grown so crazy about everything to do with nature。
(3) I can well remember that there was a time when a deep blue sky, the song of the birds, moonlight and flowers could never have kept me spellbound.
我记得非常清楚，以前，湛蓝的天空、鸟儿的歌唱、月光和鲜花，从未令我心迷神往过。
① that引起了一个宾语从句，宾语从句中又含有一个句型 there was a time when…，when从句的主语是a deep blue sky… and flowers, 谓语动词是could never have kept, 宾语是me, spellbound是个宾语补足语.
There was a time when…意思是“曾经有个时期……”如：
There was a time when I was a beautiful girl.
曾经我是个漂亮的女孩。
There was a time when life was very hard for Madame Curie.
曾经有过一个时期，居里夫人的生活非常艰难。
② Keep +O + C其中的补语可以由现在分词、过去分词、形容词等来充当，如：
He likes to keep the windows open while sleeping.
他喜欢开着窗子睡觉。
Sorry to keep you waiting so long.
很抱歉让你久等了。
The farmers keep us supplied with fresh fruit and vegetables.
农民们不断向我们供应新鲜的蔬菜和水果。
(4) The dark, rainy evening, the wind, the thundering clouds held me entirely in their power; it was the first time in a year and a half that I’d seen the night face to face…
漆黑的夜晚，风吹雨打，雷电交加，我全然被这种力量震慑住了。这是我一年半以来第一次目睹这样的夜晚……
it be the first, second,…time that… 是个固定句型，其从句的时态也是固定的，若be用一般现在时，则从句用现在完成时;若be用一般过去时，则从句用过去完成时。如：
It’s the first time that I’ve been to Beijing.
这是我第一到北京来。
It was the second time that he had made the same mistake.
他这是第二次犯同样的错误。
(5)Read the text again and do Ex2 (P3).
Step 4. Listen to the tape and read after it, paying attention to the pronunciation and intonation.
Step 5. Further discussion
What would you miss most if you had to hide like Anne and her family?
How would you describe Anne’s feeling ?
Step 6.Homework:
Read the whole text fluently.
Pick out and mark the words and phrases you can’t understand.
Period 3 Language points and learning about language
Teaching Goals:
1. Get Ss to master some useful words and expressions.
2. Get Ss to be able to use some of them.
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1. Revision
Ask some students to read the text one by one.
List the difficult words and expressions
Step 2. Language points
reason n. 理由；原因
构成句型 The reason why…is that…
The reason why he was late was that he was caught in a traffic jam.
The reason why Tom was absent from school was that he was ill.
(2) 构成短语the reason for sth./to do 和 for the reason
There’s no reason for that.
那事没什么理由。
There’s no reason to do that.
没理由那么做。
For some reason, he didn’t attend the meeting.
由于某一原因，他没有出席那次会议。
2．go through
(1) 经历；经受
The country has gone through too many wars.
The plan must go through several stages.
(2)仔细检查；审查
She went through his pockets and in the end found the keys.
(3) 经过；穿过
Go through the gate and you’ll get there.
hide away
躲藏；隐藏
She’s hidden my book away somewhere.
他把我的书藏在某个地方了。
The thief hid away in the forest.
那个贼躲藏到森林里去了。
(2) 隐匿；保密
She tried to hide her feelings away.
她设法掩饰自在的感情。
3. in order to 为了；以便
He went to the hall early in order to/so as to get a good seat.

为了得到一个好的座位，他很早就去了大厅。
In order to catch the train, he hurried through his work.
为了赶上火车，他匆匆做完了工作。
此句中in order to不能用so as to替换。
4. dare
（1）情态动词，常用于否定句、疑问句、条件句和if/whether后面,如：
---Dare you go out alone at night?
你敢晚上独自外出吗？
---I dare not go out at night alone.
我不敢晚上独自外出。
You’ll be sorry if you dare go any farther.
如果你再敢往前走，你会后悔的。
I wonder whether he dare stand up in public.
我不知道他是否敢当众挺身而出。
（2）实意动词，后常与不定式连用，但在否定句中的不定式符号常省略，如：
Young as he is, he dares to try everything.
尽管他很年轻，但他敢于尝试任何事情。
I don’t know how he dares to appear in public.
我不知道他怎么敢在公众面前露面。
I’ve never dared go back to look.
我曾来不敢回头看一下。
(3) I dare say 我想，我以为
I dare say you are British but you still need a passport to prove it.
我想你是应该人，不过你还得出示护照证实一下。
---I would imagine he’s forgotten. 我想他忘了。
--- I dare say. 我认为是这样。
Step 3. Learning about language
1.Get Ss to do the Ex1, Ex2 and Ex3 (P4).
2.Check the answers.
3. list some important points.
(1) suffer
① 受苦；受害；患病
He suffers terribly with his feet.
他脚痛的厉害。
He made a rash decision--now he’s suffering for it.
他做了一个轻率的决定—现在该自食其果了。
② 经历；遭受（不愉快的事）
We suffered huge losses in big fire.
在那次大火中我们损失惨重。
The driver has suffered pain and defeat.
这司机遭受了痛苦和失败。
③ suffer from 遭受；忍受
Do you suffer from headaches?
你常头痛吗？
She’s suffering from loss of memory.
她 患遗忘症。
（2）be in control (of sth) 指挥；管理；统治
She may be old, but she’s still in control (of all that is happening).
虽说年纪大了，她却仍在控制着局面。
Who’s in control if the project?
谁掌管这个项目？
Enemy forces are in control of the city.
敌军控制着城市。
Step 4. Homework
Using words and expressions (P41).
Period 4 Grammar
Teaching Goals:
1. Learn what direct speech and indirect speech are.
2. Get Ss to learn the transition between direct speech and indirect speech.
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1. Revision
Check up the homework
2. Revise what’s learned in learning about language by translating the following questions
敌军控制着城市
Enemy forces are in control of the city.
(2) 她 患遗忘症
She’s suffering from loss of memory.
Step 2. Leading-in
Get Ss to see the following sentences and find the differences between them.
Tom said, “I have finished my homework.”
·Tom said that he had finished his homework.
Mary said, “I’m going home tomorrow.”
·Mary said she was going home the next day.
In those two group sentences, the first one is the conversation between two people, and the second sentence is just the third person retell the conversation. The first one is direct speech and the second is indirect speech.
Step3. Presentation
The definition of direct speech and indirect speech.
Try to make clear to the students what direct and indirect speech is.
Direct speech is used to give the exact words that someone utters or has uttered in the speech.
Indirect speech conveys in the words of a subsequent speaker what has been said or written by the original speaker.
Step 4. Explanation
Get Ss to do some exercises and summarize the rules:
1. 人称的变化
(1) He said, “I like it very much.” 他说：“我非常喜欢它。”
He said that he liked it very much. 他说他非常喜欢它。
(2) He said to me, ”I’ve left my book in your room.”
他说对我说：“我把书放在你的房间里了。”
He told me that he had left his book in my room.
他告诉我把书放在我的房间里了。
总结：直接引语变间接引语后，人称要做相应的变化。
2. 时态的变化：
(1) “ I don’t want to set down a series of facts in a diary,” said Anne.
安妮说：“ 我不想在日记里记流水帐。”
Anne said that she didn’t want to set down a series of facts in a diary.
安妮说她不想在日记里记流水帐。
(2) He said, “I’m using the knife.”
他说：“我正在用刀。”
He said that he was using the knife.
他说他正在用刀。
(3) She said, “I have not heard from him since May.”
她说: “我自从五月份起就没有收到他的来信。”
She said that she had not heard from him since May.
她说她自从五月份起就没有收到他的来信。
(4) He said, “I saw her in the street.”
他说：“ 我在街上看见过她了。”
He said that he had seen her in the street.
他说他在街上看见过她了。
(5) He said, “I have finished my homework before supper.”
他说：“ 我在午饭前已经完成了我的家庭作业。”
He said that he had finished his homework before supper.
他说他在午饭前已经完成了我的家庭作业。
(6) Zhou lan said, “I’ll do it after class.”
周兰说：“我会课后完成它。”
Zhou lan said that she would do it after class.
周兰说她会在课后完成它。
总结：
直接引语与间接引语时态变化对照一览表
直接引语
间接引语
一般现在时
一般过去时
现在进行时
过去进行时
现在完成时
过去完成时
一般过去时
过去完成时
过去完成时
过去完成时
一般将来时
过去将来时

3. 指示代词、时间状语、地点状语和动词的变化
(1) she said: “ I will come this morning.”
她说：“我上午会来。”
She said that she would go that morning.
她说她上午会来。
(2) He said, “ these books are mine.”
他说：“这些书是我的。”
He said that those books were his.
他说这些书是他的。
(3) He said,“ it is nine o’clock now.”
他说：“现在9点了。”
He said that it was nine o’clock then.
他说那会9点
(4) He said,: “My sister was here three days ago.”
他说：“我妹妹三天前在这里。”
He said that his sister had been there three days before.
他说他妹妹三天前曾在这里。
(5) He said, “I haven’t seen her today.”
他说：“我今天还没有见过她。”
He said that he hadn’t seen her that day.
他说他那天没有见过她。
(6) She said, “I went there yesterday.”
她说：“我昨天在那里。”
She said that she had gone there the day before.
她说她昨天去过那里。
(7) She said, “I’ll go there tomorrow.”
她说：“我明天会去那里。”
She said that she would go there the next/following day.
她说她明天会去那里
(8) He said, “They will arrive the day after tomorrow.”
他说：“他们后天到那里。”
He said that they would arrive in two days’ time.
他说他们两天后到那里。
(9) She said, “I came here to seen the doctor the day before yesterday.”
她说：“ 我前天到这里看医生。”
She said she had gone there to see the doctor two days before.
她说她两天前到这里看医生。
时间状语、地点状语和动词的变化一览表
直接引语
间接引语
时间状语
now
then
today
that day
this week/month/year
that week/month/year
last week/month/year
the week/month/year before
tomorrow
the next/following day
next week/month/year
the next week/month/year
地点状语
here
There
动词
come
go
注意：
① 直接引语如果是客观真理，变为间接引语时，时态不变。如：
He said,“Light travels much faster than sound.”
He said that light travels much faster than sound”
② 如果在当地转述，here不必改为 there，动词come不必改为go，如果在当天转述，yesterday, tomorrow等时间状语也不必改变.
4. 祈使句
(1) She said to us, “please sit down.”
她对我们说：“请坐。”
She asked us to sit down.
她请我们坐下。
(2) he said to him,“go away!”
他对他说：“走开！”
He ordered him to go away.
他命令他走开。
(3) Mother said to me, “Come back before 10.
妈妈对我说：“十点以前回来。”
Mother told me to go back before 10。
妈妈嘱咐我十点以前回去。
(4) he said, “don’t make so much noise ,boys.”
他说：“孩子们，不要大声吵闹。”
He told the boys not to make so much noise.
他告诉孩子们不要大声吵闹。
总结：
转述祈使句时，要讲祈使句的动词原形变为不带to的不定式，并在不定式的前面根据句子的意思加上tell,ask,order等动词，如果祈使句为不定式，并在不定式的前面加not.
5. 疑问句
● 一般疑问句
(1) “ do you think a diary can become your friend?” the writer says.
作者问：“你认为日记能成为你的朋友吗？”
The writer asks us if we think a diary can become our friend.
作者问我们是否为日记能成为我们的朋友
(2) She said，“ did you see him last night?”
她问：“你昨天晚上看到他了吗？”
She asked me whether I had seen him the night before.
她问我前一天是否看到他了。
总结：
将一个一般疑问句由直接引语变成间接引语时，首先要用whether/if 连接阴雨，而且要把原来的疑问句变成陈述句语序的宾语从句； 其次，人称、时态和状语的变化与陈述句直接引语变为间接引语的方法相同。
● 特殊疑问句
(1) “ what do you want?” he asked me.“你想要什么？”他问我。

He asked me what I wanted.他问我想要什么。
(2) “ when did you go to bed last night?” father said to Anne.
爸爸问安妮：“你昨晚什么时间睡的觉？”
Father asked Anne when she went to bed the night before.
爸爸问安妮她头天晚上什么时间睡的觉。
总结：
把一个特殊疑问句由直接引语变成间接引语时，首先要用疑问词连接引语，而且要把原来的疑问句变成陈述句语序的宾语从句；其次，人称、时态和状语部分的变化与陈述句的直接引语变为间接引语的方法相同。
Step 5.Consolidation
Change the following direct speech into indirect speech and indirect speech into direct speech.
1. She asked the boy,“Is it raining?”
2. “Do you want to say something for yourself?” Mom asked Tom.
3. Jin said to me, “Tom has finished the job.”
4. He asked us what we wanted to eat that day.
5. The boy asked the girl if it snowed in winter in that city.
6. Mary said that she had already eaten lunch.
Suggested Answers:
She asked the boy if it was raining.
Mom asked Tom if he wanted to say something for himself.
Jim told me that Tim had finished the job.
H asked us, “What do you want to eat today?”
The boy asked the girl, “Does it snow in winter in this city.
Mary said,“ I’ve already eaten lunch.”
Step 6.Homework
Discovering useful structures (P5)

Period 5. Using language
Teaching Goal:
1. To review the language points in the Grammar part
2. To practice the language in a variety of realistic communicative activities.
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1. Greeting and revision
1. Check the homework
2. Revise what’s learned in Grammar part by the following multiple choices.
1. The tourist asked the guide what he _______visit the next day.
A. was going to B. will C. is going to D. is to
2. Mother asked the youngest kid ________with toy car.
A. what the matter was B. what is the matter going to be
C. what the matter is D. what is the matter
3. He asked Mary whether she had passed the exam______.
A. yesterday B. the day before C. the day ago D.before the day
4. Laura told his teacher that she_________ born in 1956.
A. was B. had been C. is D. has been
5. The doctor ______that he ______very glad to visit our country.
A said; was B said；had been C. told; was D spoke; had been
Suggested Answers: 1. A 2. A 3. B 4. A 5. B
Step 2. Leading-in
The better part of one’s life consists of his friendships, and a cheerful friend is like a sunny day spreading brightness all around. However, have you ever got pressure from your classmates because you have a special friend? Lisa is one of the girls who are in trouble with the gossip between her and a boy.
Step 3. Reading and listening
1. Now, please read Lisa’s letter to Miss Wang answer the following questions
What makes Lisa unhappy?
Can you give her some of your advice?
2. Many students think Lisa should make a positive response to pressure from her classmate’s. Now, let’s listen to the tape and see what Miss Wang tell Lisa.
Step 4. Speaking and writing
Do you agree with Miss Wang’s advice? Discuss it in small groups.
1. Group work
Four students work as a group. Design a questionnaire to find out what kind of friends your classmates are. You can use the questionnaire in Warming up as an example. You must think of four questions and three possible answers to each question. At last, ask several groups to present their questionnaires.
2. Individual work
When you have some problems, sometimes you can write to the editor of the Student English Times and ask for advice. Xiao Dong once wrote to the editor and asks for some advice.
Read the letter that Xiao Dong gave to the editor and answer the following questions
What is the Xiao Dong’s problem?
If you were the editor, what would you say to him? Then, please discuss your ideas with your classmates.
3. Writing
According to the information that you have gotten, please write your advice to Xiao dong as an editor. You can follow the points in your textbook.
Step 5. Language points
1. get along with/ get on with 与…相处；进展。
How is he getting along/on with his English?
他的英语进展如何？
He found it hard to get along with other boys.
他觉得他很难与其他男孩相处。
2． fall in love (with) 爱上（某人）
They fell in love with each other years ago.
他们已经相爱很多年了。
He fell in love with the pretty girl for the first sight.
他第一眼就爱上了这个美丽的女孩。
注意：fall 是非延续性动词，不与表示“一段时间”的状语连用。因此，不可说they have fallen in love with each other for years. 应该说 they have been in love with each other for years.
3. advice n. [u]
Could you give us some advice?
你能给我们一些建议吗？
She needs wise medical advice and help.
她需要明智的医疗咨询和帮助。
4 . join in 加入；和某人一道参加（某项活动）
I would like to join in your discussion.
我愿意加入你们的讨论。
Could you join us in the play?
你愿意加入我们的讨论吗？
Join ，join in ，take part in and attend
Step 6. Homework
Review what we have learnt in the Using language part. Finish the writing task.
Period 6 Listening, Talking (Workbook)
Teaching Goals:
To review what we have learnt in the Using Language part.
To practise listening and speaking ability by exercise.
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1. Revision
Review what we have learnt last periods by the following exercises
Word spelling
The snow is very_____(疏松) and there is a lot of air in it.
She is so______(狂热) about English that she cannot live without it.
To get as much information as possible, we should learn to________(交流).
The ______(形势) in Iraq is becoming from bas to worse.
To send me to college, my parents_______ (受苦) a lot.
Suggested Answers: (1) loose (2) crazy (3) communicate (4) situation (5) suffered
2. Sentence changing
(1) A：I have a friendly relationship with him.
B：I ____ ____ _____ with him.
(2) A: It happened that I was reading upstairs when he came in.
B: I___ ____ ______ reading when he came in.
(3) A: what you said made her angry.
B: ____ _____ what you said____ made her angry.
Suggested Answers: (1) get along well (2) happened to be (3) It was; that
Step 2. Leading-in
From the text we know that Anne took her diary as a good friend to her. Now answer the following questions.
1. Do you keep a diary? Why?
Yes. Because I want to read the things or persons that are really special to me some time later, or I don’t want to share my secret thoughts and feelings with others.
What character does a diary have?
It’s personal.
Now we’re going to listen to a passage. It’s something about a diary.
Step 3. Listening
1. Listen to the tape for the first time and try to write down what you hear.(This time the teacher push the “pause” button from time to time.)
2. Listen again and let Ss check by themselves.
3. Listen the third time and make further changes. Then check the passage with each other.
4. Do Ex 2 and 3.
5. Discussion in groups and check the answers.
6. Listen to the whole text again to have a better understanding about the passage.
Step 4. Talking
1. Discuss in groups
Why do people make friends with one another?
Friends can share sorrows and joys with each other.
Friends can help each other.
2. Listen to a short passage and try to get the general idea of the passage. Then discuss the following questions in groups of three or four.
(1) Do you agree with her?
(2) What do you think of people from foreign countries?
While talking, try to use the following expressions:
I think so. I agree. That’s correct. Exactly.
I don’t think so. I don’t agree. Of course not. I’m afraid not.
(3) Reach a conclusion and be prepared to give your reasons to the class.
Step 5. Homework
Write a short passage about what is discussed in this period.

Period 7 Reading task, Speaking task, Writing task (Workbook)
Teaching Goals:
1.To develop Ss’ reading ,speaking and writing ability.
2. To get Ss to know something about Hawaiians.
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1. Revision
Check the homework (Asking some students to read their writings)
Step 2. Reading task
1. Read the passage and decide what each of the following words means in the language of the Hawaiians.
(1) aloha (2) lokahi (3) lei (4) kokua (5) ohana
Suggested Answers:
(1) to be with happiness; goodbye; our hearts singing together
(2) oneness with all people
(3) a circle of flowers worn around the neck
(4) help
(5) family
2.Read the passage again and discuss the following questions
What are the ways Hawaiians show their friendship?
Why do many different peoples call Hawaii their home?
How do people in Hawaii get on with one another?
Can you find similar things in your hometown? How do you show friendship to visitors?
Suggested Answers:
Hawaiians say “aloha” to each other to show friendship. They welcome people with “lokahi” which means “oneness with all people”. They give visitors a “lei” to make them feel at home.
It’s because Hawaii is a place where many cultures are encouraged to live together peacefully and co-operate with each other.
They try to help each other so that all feel stronger. They solve the problems with understanding and treat all people as if they are part of the same family.
Students give their own answers.
Step 3. Speaking task
1. Group work
Students are put into situations that involve moral choices. Here are two different situations. Read the situations and choose one to discuss.
(1) You promised your friend last Tuesday that you would go on a picnic with him/her on Saturday. On Friday night you are offered one ticket to the concert on Saturday. But there are no more tickets and this is your favorite band. Will you go to the concert or the picnic?
(2) Your nest friend tells you that he/she has stolen something from a shop. He/she thinks it is funny that he/she got away with it. What will you say to him/her？
After each group comes to an agreement, have them record their solution to the problem on a piece of paper and give it to the teacher.
2. Individual work
Have a student from each group report their new solution to the class. And ask Ss to work in pairs and make a role play like the following.
S1: hello, Tom! What’s up? I have something to discuss with you. I feel very uncomfortable about this but I think we must talk about it. I have been offered a ticket to the concert.
S2: wow! That’s great! I know how much you like them and how much you have always wanted to go to the concert. Is there any chance I might get a ticket too?
S1: I am sorry. They are only staying here for one night and Mary offered me one. There was only one, or of course I would have thought of you.
S2: When are they coming? Perhaps I can queue up with you to get their autographs?
S1: That’s just what I wanted to say. The concert is on Saturday.
S2: Oh, I see. You want to change our arrangement for the picnic. Well, as a matter of fact. I cannot go either on Sunday. My cousin is coming over and we shall have to visit my friend.
S1: So it all turned out for the best. Thank goodness.
Step 4. Writing task
1. Individual work
Here are some proverbs about friends and friendship. Read them carefully and learn about the situation. Choose some you agree with and explain why. Choose some you disagree with and explain why.
2. Group work
Have a discussion with you classmates, and give your reason why you agree or disagree as follows.
(1) I agree with the following ones:
A: The same man cannot be both friend and flatterer.
B: Walking with a friend in the dark is better than walking alone in the light.
C: Friendship cannot stand always on one side.
I think a person can praise, blame, scold but shouldn’t flatter his/her friend. A friend is a treasure to his/her friends. Friends should help each other and share their joys and sorrows — true friendship isn’t one-sided.
(2) I disagree with the following ones:
A: A friend in need is a friend indeed.
B: Friends are like wine; the older, the better.
C: With clothes the new are best; with friends the old are best.
In my opinion, a friend is a friend. There should be no such terms as a true friend or a false friend. I think a false friend cannot be a friend at all. I also think that a new friend is as good as an old one. A friend, new or old, is a friend. He/she is always devoted and helpful to his/her friend.
(3) Writing
According to the information that you got from the discussion, you should write a composition on this topic. Then, polish the article and complete the Writing.
3. Homework
Write a short passage, and describe your beat friend.
Unit 1 Friendship教学设计
一、教材内容分析
本单元是高中一年级的第一单元，刚开学没多久，大家相互之间还不是很熟识，需要了解、沟通，友谊是他们生活当中必不可少的，他们每个人对友谊的认识不同，见解不一。
1．本节课的Warming up 我采用情景描述法，让学生自己用几个单词描述自己心目中的朋友或写下朋友的三个特征，让其他学生猜猜他描述的是班上哪个人。并把相关的词汇、句型写在黑板上，有利于词汇的积累。第一种方法适合基础差的学生，第二种方法适合成绩好的学生。
2．在导入的时候我采用提问法，激起学生思考
（1）Which kind of friend do you think is the best friend?
（2）What else can be our friends besides human beings?
对于第一个问题每个学生的答案不同，但有一个共识：患难见真情，他们需要的是永久的友谊而不是由于利益关系等短暂的友谊。第二个问题，一般很少有学生把人类以外的事物当成最好的朋友，有少数同学把宠物当成好朋友。
3．快速阅读：弄懂文章大意
4．细读：弄清细节，找出生词、难句并完成课后的练习1、2。
5．精读：讲解新单词、有用的短语、句型，并让学生自己举例应用。
6．深入了解文章的思想、写作风格并提出相关问题。
　 （1）．What's the advantages and disadvantages of the diary as a friend?
（2）．Why did Anne say that she had seen the night face to face on the dark, rainy evening?
7．讨论以下问题：
Ask students if they are only allowed to have five things with you in the hiding place because there is very little room, what would they choose?
8．课后练习
Can you give us some background knowledge of World War and some historical material of Jews? You may use the library or the Internet.
二、学生分析
高中一年级的学生已经在初中阶段的英语学习中积累了一定的词汇基础，并掌握了一些简单的学习策略和技巧，具有初步的英语听说读写能力。针对学生的英语水平参差不齐，教学既要进一步培养尖子的学习能力又要保证差生能听懂，调动他们的积极性，使他们愿意学，在学习的过程中享受到乐趣。他们已具备了直接思维和抽象思维的能力，正处于发展、培养创造性思维能力的最佳时期和智力向高水平发展的关键时期，他们有极强的好奇心和求知欲。他们对老师的期望也大大提高，不仅希望老师传授科学文化知识，更期望从老师那里获得更多的学习策略与技巧，分享人生经验。
三、教学目标
1.语言知识目标
通过对朋友的讨论，帮助学生发散式记忆积累相关描述人的性格、品质特征的词汇、习惯用语，并运用于听说读写当中。适当运用I thank so. I agree. I don’t think so. I don’t agree exactly. I am afraid not .Of course not.表明自己的态度和肯定程度。
2.语言技能目标
培养和提高阅读（浏览、寻读主要事实）的能力，形成用英语获取信息、处理信息、分析问题、解决问题的能力，以及用英语思维和表达相关话题、复述课文及运用所学知识描述朋友的能力。
3.文化意识目标
通过与话题相关的图片、课文的学习，逐渐形成跨文化交际意识和培养基本的跨文化的交际能力，拓宽国际视野，理解各国的文化，进行反法西斯教育，为以后深入学习中外文化奠定基础。
4.情感态度目标
通过讨论友谊激发学生保持对英语学习的浓厚兴趣；有利于帮助他们树立正确的人生观、价值观；通过对课文学习的小组讨论等形式，帮助学生养成团结、协作的品质。
5.学习策略目标
注重引导学生借助上下文联想及猜测生词，如set down a series of facts记流水账的意思，引导学生自学、自做、自悟，即指导学生形成自主学习的意识，掌握合适的学习策略。启发学生通过发散式思维积累词汇；指导学生发现规律，对所学内容进行整理和归纳；引导学生抓住信息词或关键词来理清段落大意。另外，引导学有余力的学生通过网络、图书馆来拓宽学习中外文化的渠道，并在学习活动中强化互助与共享的必要性。
四、教学策略
1．努力创设情境的原则
让学生想象自己待在一个隐蔽的地方，允许只能做的五件事，他们如何选择将学生直接带入课文的语境中。
任务驱动的原则
让学生带着问题去阅读，找出相关答案，并分析整理形成自己的观点。
交际法教学
在Warming up，让学生自己用几个单词描述自己心目中的朋友或写下朋友的三个特征，让其他学生猜猜他描述的是班上哪个人，体现了交际的功能。
五、设计思想
根据《高中英语教学大纲》的要求，在课堂教学中，必须以学生为主体，为中心进行教学，教师在教学中起主导作用。因此我采用任务型教学方式，每一部分都设有一定的任务，引导学生自主或者合作完成。阅读活动由整体入手，由易到难，步步推进，层层深入。整个教学活动以教材为载体，以学生为中心。在课堂教学中，学生应该跟老师学学习方法，提高阅读速度和阅读技巧，查找﹑分析﹑处理信息的能力以及写作能力。积极参与小组的各项活动，展现自己和小组的能力，并培养团队协作能力。在整个教学活动中，学生充分调动其各个感官进行听、说、读、写，积极主动的学习。
六、教学媒体
1. the multimedia teaching system
2. the blackboard
七、教学过程
Unit 1 Friendship
Teaching approaches: situational approaches, communicative approaches and task-based approaches
Learning objectives and demands:
1.??The activity is designed to encourage students to think about friends and friendship and to activate relevant vocabulary.
2.??Ask the students to describe a good friend and give examples of situations where friends have helped them. Use the activity as a brainstorming session done either in groups or with the whole class.
3.??Language use: speaking practice, reading
Teaching procedures:
Step 1: Warming up
Students are asked to describe themselves and a friend. You can use these questions in at least two different ways. One alternative is to ask the students to think about three words to describe themselves and then let each student tell the class the three characteristics they have chosen. A second alternative would be to ask the students to write down the three characteristics and let other students guess who is being described.
Which words can be used to describe the characteristic?
Brave: courage fearless heroic
Scared: astonish fearful frightened horrified shocked terrified timid
Loyal: devoted faithful
Wise: bright clever cute gifted intelligent smart well-learned witty
Beautiful: attractive breath-taking charming cool cute elegant graceful eye-catching good-looking inviting lovely neat pretty splendid stunning
Step 2. Leading in
Ask Students questions:
1. Which kind of friend do you think is the best friend?
Any answer is possible. Everyone may have his own reasons. But when you answer the question, you should remember the old saying" A friend in need is a friend indeed", The best friend should be a man whom you can depend on forever, not in a certain period of time.
2. What else can be our friends besides human beings?
There are many answers to this question. e.g. a dog, a cat, a dictionary, a computer, a toy car, a mobile phone, a TV set…
Step 3. While –reading
(1)Fast-reading: Get the main idea and finish comprehending exercise 1 and exercise 2
(2) Intensive reading:
1．What's the advantages（优点）and disadvantages of the diary as a friend?
　　 Possible answers：
　　 Advantages: a. He accepts all that you said to him. b. He is never angry with you. etc.
Disadvantages: a. He has no feelings and thoughts. b. He can not speak to you. etc.
2．Why did Anne say that she had seen the night face to face on the dark, rainy evening?
　　 There may be several reasons. Use your imagination to find out the possible reasons according to what you think of. e. g.
a. It is dark and safe on such a night.
b. Anne hasn't experienced the nature so closely for a long time.
c. On such a night she can throw away all her worry and other unhappy feelings. etc.
Step 4. Explain the new words and phrases in the content
短语
　1．set down　放下，记下，登记; set up　建立，搭起;　set about doing sth.　着手（开始）做某事; set out　出发，动身，开始
2．join in　加入，参加　join sb. in sth. / doing sth.; join　加入（某一伙人或某个组织）take part in　参加（有组织有纪律的活动）
3．put away　把……收拾起来，放好; put back　放回原处; put down　记下，写下，放下put off　推迟，拖延
4. be prepared for ＝ be ready for　为……作好准备; prepare for　为……作准备; prepare sb. for　使某人为……作准备; get sth. ready / prepared　把……准备好
句式
1．I haven't been outdoors for so long that I've grown so crazy about everything to do with nature. （1）so … that … 如此……以至……，引导结果状语从句；so放在句首时，句子要倒装。　　
（2）so that既可引导结果状语从句也可引导目的状语从句。引导目的状语从句时，常和can, could, may, might, would等情态动词连用。2．I'm having some trouble with my classmates at the moment.　　have（some, no, much, great, little）trouble/difficulty with sth. /（in）doing something　做某事有（一些,没有，很多，很少）因难。
3．It is believed that the islands can be a paradise（天堂）when people live in peace.It is believed that …　人们相信……; It is said that …　据说……; It is reported that …据报道……; It is supposed that …　人们认为……
Step 5 Post-reading: Discussing
Ask students if they are only allowed to have five things with you in the hiding place because there is very little room, what would they choose?
Step 6.Homework
Can you give us some background knowledge of World War and some historical material of Jews? You may use the library or the Internet.
It is up to the students themselves to complete the task.
八、评价与反思
教师反思
Have all the teaching aims been reached? _________________
Have all the students learnt something in the lesson? ________________
What can be improved? _______________________
学生反思
1. What impressed me most in the class? ________________
2. What haven’t I understood yet? ________________
3. In what aspect do I need improvement? ________________
学生课堂活动评价
Class:
Name:
Score:
Items
Understandable
5 4 3 2 1
Logical
5 4 3 2 1
Creative
5 4 3 2 1
Active
5 4 3 2 1
Cooperative
5 4 3 2 1
Others
5 4 3 2 1
九、教学后记
本节课在以下几方面效果良好：
1.突出了学生的主体地位，学生上课时积极主动发言，课堂气氛热烈；
2.从学生的问题出发营造教学情境，设计教学问题并引导学生探究、解决问题。
3.设计出了以任务型教学指导下的师生互动方式。
4.对教材内容作适当的处理，发掘出教材内容之间的内在逻辑联系及育人作用。
不足之处：
1.课堂教学要减少统一讲解，增加学生的自主探究，增加学生的分组活动。
2.争取准备两、三种针对不同群体学生的教学安排。
3.教学理念的更新、语言的简洁准确、过渡词的自然等方面仍需加强。
Unit 1 Friendship
1. Teaching aims and demands
类别
课程标准要求掌握的项目
话题
Friends and friendship; interpersonal relationships
词汇
Upset ignore calm concern loose Netherlands German series outdoors dusk thunder entire entirely power curtain dusty partner settle suffer highway recover pack suitcase overcoat teenager exactly disagree grateful dislike up tip swap item
add up calm down have got to be concerned about walk the dog go through hide away set down a series of on purpose in order to at dusk face to face on longer suffer from get/be tired of pack(sth)up according to get along with fall in love join in
功能
态度(attitudes)
Are you afraid that…?
I’ve grown so crazy about…
I didn’t dare…
2. 同意和不同意（agreement and disagreement）
I agree. I think so. Exactly.
I don’t agree. I don’t think so. I’m afraid not.
3.肯定程度（certainty）
That’s correct. Of course not.
语法
直接引语和间接引语(1): 陈述句和疑问句
陈述句
“I don’t want to set down a series of facts in a diary.” Said Anne.
----- Anne said that she didn’t want to set down a series of facts in a diary.
一般疑问句
He asked, “Are you leaving tonight?”
---He asked us whether we were leaving that night.
特殊疑问句
“When did you go to bed last night?” father said to Anne.
--- Father asked Anne when she went to bed the night before.
Suggested teaching notes
1). Analyses of the teaching contents
This unit is about friendship, and nearly all the teaching materials center on it.
Warming up---The questionnaire leads students to think and talk about
friendship, get to know the problems between friends
and seek solutions, which makes preparations for the
further teaching in topics, background and vocabulary.
Pre-reading---The questions prompt students to think critically about
friends and friendship in reality, alerting them to the fact
that besides people, a diary can be a friend, too.
Reading--- The diary by the Jewish girl Anne gave a glimpse of her life
during her family’s shelter in Amsterdam from the German
Nazis’ killing in World War 2. She treats the diary as her best friend, and in it reveals her longing for a normal life and close contact with nature, which helps her get through the days.
Comprehending---It helps students further understand the text by doing
multiple choices, questions and answers, and
matching.
Learning about language---It teaches the important expressions and
structures and grammar: direct and indirect
speeches.
Using language---The two letters, listening, questionnaire design, letter
writing and fun writing prepares students to further
talk about friendship, especially the problems with
misunderstanding, and unfriendliness, thus
strengthening students’ abilities to practice
language, discover, and solve problems.
Summing up---It summarizes the whole contents of this unit from the
aspects of topics, vocabulary and grammar.
Learning tip--- This part encourages students to form the habit of writing
a diary.
Integrating skills--- The text introduces the way Hawaiians express
friendship, to get students to realize the cultural
differences in the values of friendship in addition
its importance in all cultures.
2) Making of the teaching plan
This unit centers on friends and friendship, exploring different types of
friendship with particular attention to that one can develop with oneself, i.e., the comfort and support one seeks from an imaginary friend.
Students are expected to come to be truly aware of the qualities and
conducts that make a good friend, display and develop the ability to
cope with misunderstanding, conflicts and problems related to
friendship, and give advice on it. The concept that even an ordinary
thing can be a friend should break down the traditional belief in the
interpersonal nature of friendship. Also, the comparison of similarities
dissimilarities in friendship comprehension between the East and the
West leads students to know better the values of friendship in Westerns’
eyes. All in all, this unit promises to unveil the true essence of friendship
and helps students to lead a more friendly and harmonious life.
Thus, based on the theme, contents and teaching objectives, the whole teaching procedures can fall into five periods as follows:
Period 1
Warming up and speaking
Period 2
Reading
Period 3
Grammar
Period 4
Integrating skills (WB)
Period 5
Using language
3. Teaching plans for each period
Period 1 Warming-up and Speaking
1. Teaching objectives:
1) Target language
I (don’t) think…… I (don’t) think so. I (don’t) agree.
I believe…… That’s correct. In my opinion, …
2) Ability goals
Describe your friends in English
Figure out the problems between friends and then find different ways to solve the problems.
3)Learning ability goals
To encourage students to think and talk about friends and friendship by using some phrases and structures.
To learn to solve problems that may occur between friends.
c. To cultivate the students to form the good habit of learning English in Senior Middle School.
2. Teaching important points:
Use the given adjectives and sentence structures to describe one of your friends.
Learn to evaluate friends and friendship.
3. Teaching difficult points:
Work together with partners and describe one of your good friends.
Discuss with partners and find out ways to solve the problems.
4. Teaching methods
Task-based teaching and learning
Cooperative learning
Discussion
5. Teaching aids:
CAI
6. Teaching procedures and ways:
Step 1 Lead-in and Warming-up
Before the lesson, the teacher can arouse the students’ interests by showing a video of Auld Lang Syne.
At the beginning of the first class, we can get the students to talk about their summer holidays. The students can talk freely as they like.
How did you spend your summer holidays? How did you feel? What did you do in your summer holidays? What did you do in your spare time?
What do you think of our new school? Do you like it? Could you say something about it?
Do you like making friends? How do get in touch with your friends? Do you have many friends? Where are they now? Do you have any old friends in our school? Have you made any new friends in our class?
Step 2 Think it over
1. Give a brief description of one of your friends. The following phrases and structures may be helpful:
His/Her name is …
He /She is … years old.
He /She likes … and dislikes …
He /She enjoys … and hates…
He /She is very kind/friendly/…
When /Where we got to know each other.
2. What types of friendship do you have? Please tick them out. Then fill in the blanks.
girl friends boy friends pen friends
long -distance friends friends of the same age
e-friends (friends over the internet) friends across generations
unusual friends like animals, books……
1) ______ is /are most important to you.
2) You spend most of your free time with ____.
3) You will share your secrets with _____.
4) When in trouble, you will first turn to _____.
Step 3 Make a survey
1. List some qualities of a good friend or your ideal friend. Have the students get into groups of four to find out what each has listed.
Tell your partner your standards of good friends by using the following structure:
I think a good friend should (not) be……
In my opinion, a good friend is someone who……
Have a member of each group report on what their lists have in common and list them on the board.
Ask the class whether or not they agree with all the qualities listed.
Then have the students do the survey in the textbook.
Have the students score their survey according to the scoring sheet on page 8.
The teacher ask some students how many points they got for the survey and assess their values of friendship:
★ 4~7 points: You are not a good friend. You either neglect your friend’s needs or just do what he/she wants you to do. You should think more about what a good friend needs to do.
★ 8~12 points: You are a good friend but you sometimes let your friendship become too important, or you fail to show enough concern for your friend’s needs and feelings. Try to strike a balance between your friend’s needs and your own responsibilities.
★ 13+ points: You are an excellent friend who recognizes that to be a good friend you need balance your needs and your friend’s. Well done.
(You may also show your students the results above and let themselves self-reflect upon their own values of friendship)
Step 4 Talking and sharing ( work in pairs)
1. If your best friend does something wrong, what will you do?
Try to use the following phrases:
I (don’t) think…… I (don’t) think so.
I (don’t) agree. I believe…
That’s correct. In my opinion, …
What to do
?reasons
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
2. What is a friend?
A British newspaper once offered a prize for the best definition(定义) of a friend. If you were the editor, choose the best one from the following entries(条目), and explain why.
One who understands my silence.
A friend in need is a friend indeed.
Friends are just the people who share your happiness and sorrow.
When you look at your watch at 4 am, but still know you can call
them and wake them up, and they’ll still want to talk to you ,that’s
friendship.
To have a friend, you need to be a good friend.
Step 5 Group work (output)
The teacher can give each group one of these questions below to talk about. Then let the class share their ideas. It’s better to stimulate the students to express their own opinions about these questions.
Do you think it is a good idea to borrow money from your friend?
Why and Why not?
2. What factors may cause the breakdown of a good friendship?
3. What can be your unusual friend besides human beings? And why?
Step 6 Homework
Write down a short passage about your ideas /the factors/your unusual friends.
Prepare for the new lesson.
Period 2 Reading “Anne’s Best Friend”
1. Teaching objectives:
1) To develop the students’ reading ability, learn to use some reading strategies such as guessing, key sentences, skimming and so on;
2). To get the students to realize the importance of friends and friendship, and to tell true friends from false friends;
3). To grasp some useful words and expressions in this passage, such as on purpose, be crazy about etc.
4). To learn the writing style of this passage.
2. Teaching method: Task-based teaching
3). Teaching procedure:
Step 1 Pre-reading
1. Please enjoy three pieces of music and find out what they are about.
2 .Why do you think friends are important to you?
3. What do you think a good friend should be like? List the good qualities a good friend should have.
4. Have you ever considered making friends with animals, plants or even an object? Why or why not?
Step 2 Reading
1. Try to guess what Anne’s friend is and what the passage is about by reading the title and having a quick at the pictures in this passage without reading it.
2. Skimming the first two paragraphs to confirm your guessing.
1) What was Anne’s best friend? Why did she make friends with it?
2) Did she have any other true friends then? Why?
3) What is the difference between Anne’s diary and those of most people?
4) Do you keep a diary? What do you think most people set down in their diaries?
5) We are going to read one of Anne’s diaries .but before reading, can you tell me what the diary is about with the help of one key sentence in the 2nd paragraph?
3. Reading of Anne’s diary
How she felt in the hiding place
Two examples to show her feelings then
Step 3 Post-reading
1. What would you miss most if you went into hiding like Anne and her family? Give your reasons.
2. Group work
Work in groups to decide what you would do if your family were going to be killed just because they did something the Emperor did not like.
Where would you plan to hide? How would you arrange to get food given to you every day?
What would you do to pass the time?
------
3. Discovering useful words and expressions
Complete the following sentences, using words and expressions from Reading
1) She has grown _______ about computer games.
2) Was it an accident or did David do it on _______?
3) From the beginning ,Paul made it clear that he would be ______ (完全地)in control.
4) He used to work _______ even in the middle of winter.
5) Just the _______ of more food made her feel sick.
6) You had better have a _________ talk with him.
7) Born in a poor family, the manager _________ lots of hardships in his childhood.
8) A diary is often kept to ________ what happens in people’s daily lives.
Step 4 Talking about friends and friendship
1. There are many proverbs about friends and friendship. Choose the one you agree with and explain why, then choose one you disagree with and explain why.
A friend in need is a friend indeed.
Friends are like wine; the older, the better.
A friend to all is a friend to none.
The same man cannot be both friend and flatterer(阿谀奉承者).
False friends are worse than open enemies.
Walking with a friend in the dark is better than walking alone in the light.
2. We have talked about friends and friendship today, can you write one or two sentences to express your understanding of friends and friendship.
Step 5 Homework:
1. Interview a high school student, a businessman, a police officer and a housewife to find out their opinions about friends and friendship. Write a report to share it with the whole class.
2. Describe one of your best friends following the writing style of this passage.
Ending: Let’s sing this song about friends together
Period 3 Grammar
1．Teaching objectives
Learn to use direct speech and indirect speech
2. Teaching important point
Summarize the rules of Direct Speech and Indirect Speech.
3. Teaching difficult point
Learn about the special cases in which the tenses shouldn’t be changed.
4. Teaching methods
Discussing, summarizing and practicing.

5. Teaching procedures
Step1 Lead in
T: In the last lesson, we learned Anne Frank’s story. She is telling her stories to two of her friends—you and Tom. Tom has something wrong with his ears, so you have to repeat Anne’s sentences, using indirect speech. Sometimes you explain Tom’s sentences to Anne.
“I have to stay in the hiding place.” said Anne. →
Anne said she had to stay in the hiding place.
“Do you feel sad when you are not able to go outdoors?” Tom asked Anne. →
Tom asked Anne if/whether she felt sad when she was not able to go outdoors.
“I don’t want to set down a series of facts in a diary,” said Anne.→
Anne said that she didn’t want to set down a series of facts in a diary.
“What do you call your diary?” Tom asked. →
Tom asked what she called her diary.
Ss go on this topic by themselves.
Step 2 Grammar
T: Now let’s look at these sentences again. If we want to change Direct Speech into Indirect Speech, what should be changed?
Ss discuss by themselves.
Ss: sentence structures, tenses, pronouns, adverbials of time and place and verbs should be changed.
T: Quite right. Look at the form on the screen. These are the rules.
直接引语变成间接引语时，要注意以下几点：人称变化、时态变化、宾语从句要用陈述句语序。
1.直接引语是陈述句，变成间接引语时，由连词that 引导。例如：
　　She said, "I am very happy to help you."→
　　She said that she was very happy to help you.
2. 直接引语是一般/选择疑问句，变成间接引语时，由连词whether或if 引导。例如：
　　He asked me, "Do you like playing football?"→
　　He asked me if/whether I liked playing football.
注意：大多数情况下，if和whether 可以互换，但后有or not,或在动词不定式前，或放在介词后作连接词时，一般只用whether。例如：
　　She asked me whether he could do it or not.
　　
3. 直接引语是特殊疑问句，变成间接引语时，由相应的疑问词who, whom, whose, how, when, why, where 等引导。例如：
　　My sister asked me, "How do you like the film?"→
　　My sister asked me how I liked the film.
4. 直接引语是祈使句，变成间接引语时，把动词原形变成动词不定式，并在动词不定式前加tell, ask, order 等的宾语。例如：
　　The captain ordered, "Be quiet."→
　　The captain ordered us to be quiet.
　　注意：此种情况的否定句，在动词不定式前加not。
　　My teacher asked me, "Don't laugh."→
　　My teacher asked me not to laugh.
5. 一些注意事项
(1)间接引语一般要用陈述句的语序，即主、谓、宾的顺序。例如：
　　He asked Lucy, "Where did you go?"→
　　He asked Lucy where she went.
　　Tom said, "What do you want, Ann?"→
　　Tom asked Ann what she wanted.
(2)直接引语是客观事实、普遍真理等，变成间接引语时，时态不变。例如：
　　They told their son, "The earth goes round the sun."→
　　They told their son that the earth goes round the sun.
(3)直接引语变间接引语时， 指示代词、时间状语、地点状语等要作相应的变化。例如：
　　He said, "I haven't seen her today."→
　　He said that he hadn't seen her that day.
注意：如果转述时就在原来的地方，就在说话的当天，就不必改变指示代词、时间状语、地点状语等。
Direct Speech Indirect Speech
Present past
Past past and past perfect
Present perfect past perfect
Past perfect past perfect
Present continuous past continuous
Step 3 practice
T: Turn to Page 5. Please change the following direct speech into indirect speech and indirect into direct.
“I’m going to hide from the Germans,” Anne said.
“I don’t know the address of my new home,” said Anne.
“I cannot ask my father because it is not safe to know,” she said.
“I had to pack up my things very quickly,” the girl said.
“Why did you choose your diary and old letters?” Dad asked her.
Mum asked her if/whether she was very hot with so many clothes on.
Margot asked her what else she had got.
Anne asked her father when they would go back home.
Anne asked her sister how she could see her friends.
Mother asked Anne why she had gone to bed so late the night before.
Step 4 Correcting mistakes
T analyses the common mistakes Ss have made during the practice.
T: Now let’s look at the screen and pay attention to these sentences. Choose the right sentence and tell me why the other one is wrong.
Step 5 Play a game
Play a guessing game “who is my secret friend?” One student comes to the front with his partner.
The rest students ask him questions while his partner changes them into indirect speech. In the end, the person who has guessed the right answer can come to the front to take the place of the first student .So the game goes on.
Suggested sentences:
Can your friend speak?
What does he/she wear today?
Is he/she tall or short?
What do you and your friend do in your free time?
Do you quarrel with each other?...
Step 6 Homework
Do Exercise1 on Page 42. Here is another page of Anne’s diary. Read it through and then use indirect speech to retell the story.
Period 4 Integrating skills
“Friendship in Hawaii”
1. Teaching objectives:
To learn about ways of showing friendship in Hawaii and share their opinions on friendship. Because it is a lesson of integrating skills, Ss are also asked to write sentences on friendship.
2. Teaching procedures:
Step1 Lead-in
1. Talk about different ways of showing friendship of minority groups in China.
2. Compare Chinese ways of showing friendship with Western ways. And discuss why there is a big difference. Therefore, show the sentence: Every culture has its own ways to show friendship.
3. Ask students if they can think of any place in the world where Chinese and Western cultures live side by side. They may think of Hongkong, Macao, Singapore. And the teacher will add one more -------Hawaii.
Step2 Fast reading
1. It is said that Hawaii is a place where the East truly meets the west. Consider how people show their friendship in Hawaii.
Show a picture and find the information from the textbook. ( by giving “leis” to one another.)
Explain what is a “lei”.
2. Read fast and find out more ways to show friendship in Hawaii to fill in the form.
3. According to the form, ask them to consider what friendship is in Hawaiians.
Step 3 Careful reading
Read the 2nd paragraph carefully and ask “Why do many different peoples call Hawaii their home?”
(Hawaii is a place where people make one big community from many smaller communities. It means Hawaii has a rich cultural diversity.)
Step 4 Writing task
Show proverbs about friends and friendship. Explain them and ask Ss to choose some they agree with and some they disagree with and explain why.
Discuss with their partner and try to write some similar sentences to show their opinions on friendship.
Step 5 Homework
Surf the Internet to collect materials like poems, stories about friendship. And share them with your friends.
Period 5 Listening & Writing
1. Teaching objectives
To practise students’ listening ability.
To practise students’ writing skills of how to offer advice.
To improve students’ ability to help others solve problems.
2. Teaching procedure
(Analysis: Listening and writing are expansion of the topic of the text. Listening is about Lisa’s problem of making a friend with a boy. She asks Miss Wang for advice. Through listening and exercise, students learn how to give advice and the skill of giving advice. And also let them think about the problem of boy’s making friends with girls and girls with boys. And then design a task to ask students to give advice according to the different problems to practise their ability to solve the problems. All of these lay the foundation for the next task writing. In this way, students feel that they have information to put out. And writing makes for the improvement of students’ writing ability, strengthening their comprehension of friendship.)
Step 1 Lead-in
Do you remember what Ann’s best friend is?
Is it a man or a thing?
Have you seen the film Cast Away?
When Tom is alone on a deserted island, what does he make friends with? ( a volleyball)
Guess what my best friend is? (Say sth. about music, pets or plants.)
So you see a man can make friends with anyone and anything.
Then boys, would you like to make friends with girls? Girls, would you like to make friends with boys?
What kind of girl would you like to make friends with? And what kind of boy would you like to make friends with?
If you see a boy classmate makes a friend with a girl, will you say something about them behind?
(If no, say you are kind. If yes, say you are a gossiper.)
If you are that boy/girl, would you like to be gossiped about?
But here Lisa has such a problem. Read the letter. Lisa is asking you for help. What advice will you give? You are given 2 minutes to discuss in groups and then offer group’s opinions.
Step 2 Listening
Besides you Lisa also asks Miss Wang of Radio for Teenagers for help. What advice does Miss Wang give to Lisa? Let’s listen to what she says.
Listen for 3 times and do listening exercises.
Step 3 Post-listening
Do you think Miss Wang’s advice is helpful?
Now suppose you are editors of Radio for Teenagers, here are some problems for you to offer advice.
(Give each group a problem and ask them to write down their advice.)
I don’t have enough pocket money.
I’m not satisfied with my appearance.
My desk mate has lost a reference book, she/he thinks that I’m a thief.
I work hard but I hardly make progress.
I want to travel to WuZhen Town with my fiends this weekend, but my parents don’t allow me to go.
I don’t like the way Mr. Li teaches us English, so I’m not interested in English any longer.
My mother has just given birth to my little brother. I’m worried that the baby will rob me of my parents’ love and even everything.
I quarreled with my best friend 3 days ago. Up to now, we haven’t said a word to each other.
I’d like to be monitor, but at the same time I doubt whether I have such ability.
I’m often late for school. The teacher is so angry that he threatens that if I’m late again, I will be dismissed.
Step 4 Writing
Your advice is good and helpful. All of you are qualified editors. Now I have just received a letter from a lonely boy. Read the letter, what is his problem? What is your advice for him? Write a reply.
Step 5 Homework
Write a story about you and your friend.
Unit1 测试题
Ⅱ. 语言知识及应用（共两节，满分35分）
第一节 完形填空(共10小题；每小题2分，满分20分)
阅读下面短文，掌握其大意，然后从21-30各题所给的A、B、C和D项中，选出最佳选项。
I stutter (口吃) and was always embarrassed. Even I was home-schooled because of it. I had no friends and thought no one liked me because I was 21 . I thought no one else stuttered.
Well, 2 years ago I started speech therapy (治疗) and began to 22 that I wasn’t alone. There were many people who stuttered and that made me feel a little 23 . But, I was still unhappy, because I had no 24 .
One day my speech doctor told me that a group of people who stuttered often held parties at night and 25 others to join. I was afraid to be made to speak but anyway I 26 to go. When I got there, I was 27 to talk to anyone — but right away a kid walked up and 28 me his name. And he stuttered. I felt less nervous, so I told him my name and we started talking. He suggested I go around and talk to others. I was afraid at first, but then I did it.
I hadn’t predicted how well the 29 would go at all. It was a lot of fun.
I now become self-confident. I often go to public places to talk to other kids with the same 30 .
21. A. embarrassed B. different C. happy D. alone
22. A. realize B. wish C. imagine D. say
23. A. worse B. younger C. busier D. better
24. A. friends B. dreams C. doctors D. classes
25. A. made B. encouraged C. helped D. taught
26. A. refused B. pretended C. decided D. learned
27. A. confident B. ready C. pleased D. afraid
28. A. wrote B. passed C. told D. sent
29. A. night B. holiday C. morning D. summer
30. A. hobby B. interest C. problem D. homework
第二节 语法填空 (共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分)
阅读下面短文，按照句子结构的语法性和上下文连贯的要求，在空格处填入一个适当的词或使用括号中词语的正确形式填空，并将答案填写在后面标号为31-40的相应位置上。
I’m a high school teacher and work in a small school. I will welcome each student 31 the hallway by their names at least twice every week. Some students are going to leave school for further study 32 they are becoming very sad.
Today a girl stopped me and asked 33 I could wait a minute. I said yes and then she handed me 34 envelope. In it was a thank-you note. In the note, she said that she wanted to thank me for talking to her. I remembered asking her 35 she lived and what books she had read. This student was a shy and 36 (silence) person. It was hard 37 her to get used to school life, because there were so many people in one building.
Her note meant so much to me and I couldn’t help
38 (cry). At the same time, I was very happy because she 39 (spend) time and energy doing things that all students would be able to do. Whenever I think about
40 I will smile. I love teaching and I am so lucky to be able to be a teacher. What a lovely gift I received from this student.
31. ____ 32. ____ 33. ____ 34. ____ 35. ____
36. ____ 37. ____ 38. ____ 39. ____ 40. ____
Ⅲ. 阅读 （共两节，满分40分）
第一节 阅读理解 （共15小题；每小题2分，满分30分）
阅读下列短文，从每题所给的A、B、C和D项中，选出最佳选项。
■
A
难度：★
Every English learner hopes to find a patient native speaker who will politely correct mistakes and teach him some useful new vocabulary. But native speakers can be hard to find. If you’re having trouble communicating in English, American situation comedies are one good way to help.
They can not only give you a lot of information about American culture, but also offer some useful daily expressions. Watching them will help you enlarge your vocabulary and teach you correct language usage in different situations. Best of all, situation comedies are a fun way to learn.
The Apprentice
　　The American reality (现实) TV show is hosted by the famous businessman Donald Trump. It’s based on the idea of the final job interview for the final job. The show picks 16 people to compete for a job with Trump’s business. Those who fail their weekly tasks have to meet with Trump. They have to explain why they should not be fired (解雇).
The Apprentice is useful for English students who want to learn how to make up a persuasive (令人信服的) argument. For example, rather than say “I think I did a good job”, one may also learn to throw off the possibility of uncertainty by saying, “I did a good job.”
Desperate Housewives (DH)
Desperate Housewives is set in an invented American town, Wisteria Lane. It follows a group of middle-aged women as they go through their daily family lives. But in fact, those women live a life of lies, secrets, criminal (犯罪的) acts, and mystery.
This program is good at expressing the funny life of American neighbors. And, it’s the perfect comedy series for foreign learners wanting to see how to hold a relaxed daily conversation.
Another reason for watching DH is to learn some expressions American families use that are not in your English language textbooks. For example, the mothers often use words such as “sport” and “you guys” to speak about their kids. 　　
41. According to the passage, The Apprentice and DH are introduced because _____.
A. they are now the most popular programs
B. they are helpful in English learning
C. they are advertised for English beginners
D. they are enjoyed by most young people
42. Through watching the two American comedy series, English learners can do the following EXCEPT _____.
A. communicate with native speakers
B. know about American culture
C. pick up English daily expressions
D. learn more English words
43. In the author’s opinion, learning English through TV series is _____.
A. common B. difficult
C. enjoyable D. possible
44. We can learn from the passage that The Apprentice _____.
A. tells a story of school life
B. is about real life
C. has 15 actors
D. is about some businessmen
45. Which of the following statements about DH can we get from the introduction?
A. The story happens in a village of America.
B. The housewives join in the same job interview.
C. The women in the American town lead a life full of sadness.
D. It does well in describing an interesting neighborhood in America.
B
难度：★★
Two good friends, Sam and Jason, met with a car accident on their way home one night. The next morning, Sam woke up blind. His legs were broken. The doctor, Mr Lee was standing by his bed, looking at him with a thoughtful expression. When he saw Sam awake, he asked, “How are you feeling, Sam?” Sam smiled and said, “Not bad, Doctor. Thank you for doing the operation (手术).” Mr Lee was moved by Sam. When he was leaving, Sam said, “Please don’t tell Jason about it.” “... OK.” Mr Lee replied.
Months later when Jason’s wounds (伤) healed, Sam was still very sick. Neither could he see or walk. What he could do was just stay in his wheelchair all day long. At first, Jason stayed with him for a few days. But days later, Jason felt very discouraged and embarrassed to spend time staying with a disabled man like Sam. So he went to see Sam less and less. He made new friends. From then on, he didn’t go to visit Sam any more. Sam didn’t have any family or friends other than Jason. He felt very sad.
Things went from bad to worse. Sam died a year later. When Jason came, Mr Lee gave a letter to him. It was from Sam. In the letter Sam said, “Dear Jason, I am disabled. But I want you to be a healthy man. So I gave my eyes to you so that you can enjoy life as a healthy man. Now you have new friends. I’m glad to see that you are as healthy and happy as usual. I’m glad you live a happy life. You are always my best friend ... ... Sam”. When he finished reading the letter Mr Lee said, “I have promised that I will keep this a secret until Sam is gone. Now you know it.” Jason stood there. Tears ran down his face.
46. The reason why Sam thanked Mr Lee was that ____.
A. Mr Lee was very kind and friendly to him
B. Mr Lee came to see him early in the morning
C. Mr Lee did the operation according to his wish
D. Mr Lee saved both his and Jason’s lives
47. Which of the following happened according to the order of time?
a. Jason made new friends.
b. Sam gave his eyes to Jason.
c. Sam and Jason were caught in a car accident. d. Sam became disabled and needed friends.
e. Sam died and Jason knew the truth.
A. dacbe B. dcbea
C. cbdae D. cdbea
48. We can infer from the passage that ____.
A. Sam drove too badly and caused the car accident
B. the unsuccessful operation led to Sam’s blindness
C. Jason knew how Sam helped him before Sam died
D. it was Jason that was made blind in the car
accident
49. Sam was a man who ____.
A. thought friendship was very important
B. was unfriendly to his friends
C. felt hopeless after the car accident happened D. always listened to his friends
50. The underlined word “healed” in the second paragraph may mean “____”.
A. was sleepy after working for a long time B. became healthy again (after being ill)
C. felt surprised when hearing bad news
D. ran away when something bad happened
C
难度：★★★
It is very easy to cook instant noodles （方便面） in a short time by putting the noodles into the boiling water. However, have you ever thought whether it is the right way of cooking instant noodles?
When we first took out the noodles, we can notice that the noodles are joined together nicely as a piece. However, few people know that when the instant noodles are made, wax coating (蜡涂层) will be put on the noodles. The wax coating on the instant noodles is used to prevent the noodles from sticking together. It makes the noodles look very nice.
Researches have shown that the wax coating on the noodles is quite harmful (有害的) to our health. If you eat the instant noodles today, you’d better wait for several days before you eat instant noodles next time since our bodies need about 3 days to clear the wax coating away from our bodies. Do you know the consequence (结果) of having too much wax coating in our bodies? It will lead to cancer if the wax coating is stored in our bodies for a long time.
So it is very important to wash away the wax coating on the instant noodles if we don’t want our bodies to be in danger. You can do like this: 1. Wash the instant noodles with warm water first, and then pour away the water containing the wax coating. 2. Repeat Step 1 and try to stir (搅动) the noodles to wash away the wax coating on the noodles before cooking it in a new pot of water.
I hope this passage will make those who enjoy eating instant noodles and eat the instant noodles often know about the hidden danger of instant noodles. Although the instant noodles are very easy to cook and help us save a lot of time, I still don’t think it healthy to eat them too often or too much. Why not say “No” to instant noodles and have some healthy food?
51. People use wax coating when making instant noodles to ____.
A. make the instant noodles more delicious B. stop the noodles from sticking together
C. help keep the noodles from going bad D. make it easy to cook the instant noodles
52. Why does the author advise people to wait for a few days before they eat instant noodles again?
A. Because the bodies need enough time to clear off the wax coating.
B. Because enjoying instant noodles will take the
bodies a long time.
C. Because their bodies will need instant noodles
several days later.
D. Because doing this can prevent people getting tired of instant noodles.
53. According to the passage, if people eat instant noodles too often, they will probably ____.
A. put on some weight
B. save a lot of time
C. catch some illness
D. save much money
54. What does the author call on people to do?
A. Learn how to choose the right instant noodles.
B. Take instant noodles as breakfast every morning.
C. Eat instant noodles as soon as they buy them.
D. Have healthy food instead of instant noodles.
55. The passage is mainly written for people who ____.
A. want to do some research on instant noodles B. make a living by selling instant noodles
C. plan to invent a new kind of instant noodles D. like instant noodles and eat them often
第二节 信息匹配（共5小题；每小题2分，满分10分）
以下是一些招聘信息：
A. Fulltime Drivers Wanted Male. Clean drive license. Must be of smart appearance. Aged 25—45. Three years driving experience or more. Apply to: Capes Taxis, 17 Palace Road, Roston.
B. Air Hostesses wanted Southern Airline needs air hostesses for international flights. Applicants must be between 20 and 33 years old; height 1.65 to 1.75m; able to use two languages at least, MUST be able to swim. Apply to: Recruitment Office, Southern Airline, Heathrow Airport West, HR 37KK.
C. Teachers Needed Female. For private language school. Teaching experience unnecessary. Aged 25—30. Apply to: Ltd. 279 Canal Street, Roston.
D. Food Servers wanted Planet Hollywood, the biggest and busiest restaurant in London is seeking food servers. Female. Aged 20—28. If you have experience in working in big restaurants and are looking for a job, come and have an interview. Friday. 26th, May from 9:30am to 7:30pm. 13 Coventry Street, London, WI.
E. Secretary needed Female. 20—30. Busy lawyers need an experienced secretary. Typing experience is required. Shorthand (速记) skills are necessary. Please send your CV to: Box No. 9246 c/o evening standard classified, 2 Derry Street, Kensington W85EE.
F. Nurse Wanted Female. Aged 20—30. Being patient and able to nurse an old couple. Artist/Prof family Notting Hill. 3 days per week. Some extra hours possibly required. Good payment. Native Chinese only. 071-221-7375.
以下是一些应聘人员的信息，请根据这些信息，匹配他/她应聘的岗位：
56. Zhang Qian is a Chinese girl and she is 23 now. She graduated from a medical college last year. She would like to find a job as a doctor or nurse but she hasn’t found a job since she graduated.
57. Tom is 38 years old. He has been a driver for more than ten years. He is a smart, patient and careful man and he has never caused any accidents since he became a driver. He just moved to this city and wants to find a full-time job as a driver.
58. Helen is 26 years old. She can type 240 words a minute and have worked as a typist for about one year in a big company. She can write down useful information quickly. She is a lovely girl and has skills to communicate with others.
59. Mary is 22 years old now. She wants to work in some big restaurants and learn some managing skills. She is tall and lovely and always wears smile. She has one year experience as a waitress in a big restaurant.
60. Jane is 1.70 meters tall and is now 25 years old. She is a Chinese native, and she can speak English and German. She is a pretty, brave girl and good at swimming. She wants to find a good job.
Ⅳ. 写作 （共两节，满分40分）
第一节 基础写作（共1小题；满分15分）
假设你是新华中学的学生李明，最近从英国朋友David的来信中得知他要过十六岁生日了。
【写作内容】
请通过E-mail，根据下列要点用英语给他写封祝贺信：
1. 祝贺他生日快乐；
2. 感谢他两年来在英语学习方面给你的帮助；
3. 希望他在方便的时候来中国游玩。
参考词汇：look forward to 期盼
【写作要求】
1.必须使用5个句子介绍所给出的全部内容；
2.信的格式已经为你写好，不计入必写句子中。
【评分标准】
概括准确，语言规范，内容合适，篇章连贯。
Dear David,
______________________________________________________________________________________________.
Yours,
Li Ming
第二节 读写任务 （共1小题；满分25分）
阅读下面的短文，然后按照要求写一篇150词左右的英语短文。
How to Make Friends
It is not possible for one to live alone in the world. Indeed, there are many things which we cannot do alone. We need our friends’ help. Friends are people who will help us when we are in trouble, and care about us when we are lonely.
Our friends will help us a lot in everyday life. Good friends will guide us and help us and good friends are also advisers, because our own points of view of things may not be always right.
Of course, we can make friends everywhere. We will make many friends at school, where we can find boys and girls of the same age, so it is easy to get to know one another in a short time. Besides, we can also make friends with the people around us.
In order to make friends, we should be honest and kind. At the same time, we should see if your friends are bad boys or girls who are dangerous to you and the people around.
[写作内容]
1 以约30个词概括短文的内容要点；
2 以约120个词就“如何交朋友”这个主题发表你的看法，至少包含以下的内容要点：
1) 友谊的重要性；
2) 如何交朋友；
3) 好朋友应具有什么品质。
[写作要求]
你可以使用实例或其他论述方法支持你的论点，也可以参照阅读材料的内容，但不得直接引用原文中的句子。
[评分标准]
概括准确，语言规范，内容合适，篇章连贯。
参考答案及解析
21-25 BADAB 26-30 CDCAC
31. in 32. so
33. if/whether 34. an
35. where 36. silent
37. for 38. crying
39. spent 40. this/it
41-45 BACBD 46-50 CCDAB
51-55 BACDD 56-60 FAEDB
基础写作
Dear David,
I’m very glad to learn that your 16th birthday is coming and I’m very eager to join all your friends in wishing you a happy birthday. It has been two years since we became friends, and you have offered me so much help with my English study. Now I’ve made great progress in my study, so I really appreciate your help. We helped each other and shared our experience during the last two years, and I hope we’ll be good friends forever. Here I’d like to wish you many Happy Returns of the day and I’m looking forward to your coming to China whenever it is convenient for you.
Yours,
Li Ming
读写任务
We can’t live alone in the world and we need to get help from our friends. We should be honest and kind, so that we can make many good friends.
In my opinion, being friendly to each other or making friends with one another is very important. When one feels bored, he can talk to his friends. When one is in trouble, he can tell his friends and ask for help. If we want to make good friends, we should be honest, warm-hearted and strong. We should always care about our friends.
Real friends should share their feelings and thoughts. They can help each other and learn from each other. If one makes a mistake, his friends will point it out for him. But one must be careful when he makes friends with some strangers on the Internet because bad friends are very dangerous.
21. B。根据下文“I thought no one else stuttered.”可知答案。
22. A。此处是说：两年前，“我”开始接受语言治疗，这时才意识到还有很多人也口吃。
23. D。根据上文“... I wasn’t alone. There were many people who stuttered ...”可知，得知“有很多人口吃”，让“我”感觉稍稍好了一点。
24. A。根据上文“I had no friends ...”可知答案。
25. B。此处是说：“我”的医生告诉“我”，有一些口吃的人经常在晚上举行聚会，鼓励口吃的人们都来参加。
26. C。根据下文“When I got there ...”可知，虽然“我”担心会在聚会上被迫开口讲话，但是不管怎么样，“我”还是决定去。
27. D。根据下文“I felt less nervous ...”可知，到了那里，“我”还是很害怕开口讲话。
28. C。根据下文“And he stuttered. ... so I told him my name and we started talking.”可知答案。
29. A。根据上文“... held parties at night ...”可知答案。
30. C。此处是说：现在“我”经常去一些公共场合，跟那些和我有相同困扰的小朋友聊天。
31. in。考查介词。表达在走廊里的介词应使用in。
32. so。考查连词。空格前后句存在着前因后果的关系，故本空应填入连词so。
33. if/whether。考查宾语从句引导词。一般疑问句变间接引语时，原问句变成由if/whether引导的宾语从句。
34. an。考查冠词。信封为首次出现，应为泛指，故使用不定冠词。
35. where。考查连接副词。根据空格前面的asking可知，本句是表疑问的间接引语，且从句缺少地点状语，因此使用where。
36. silent。考查词形变化。由and前面的形容词shy可知，此处应使用silence的形容词形式silent。
37. for。考查介词。根据句意可知，此处要表达的是，对于女孩来说她很难适应学校生活。故此处应填for。
38. crying。考查动名词。couldn’t help后应使用动名词，故本空应填入crying作宾语。
39. spent。考查动词。根据本段时态可知，此处应填spend的过去式。spend ... (in) doing, 意为花费时间或精力做某事。
40. this/it。考查代词。本空缺少宾语，根据句意“无论何时我想起这件事我都会微笑”可知，此处应使用指示代词this/it指代上文所提到的事。
文章大意：要是你觉得自己的英语口语还有一些障碍，试试看美剧学英语吧，《飞黄腾达》和《绝望主妇》会是非常不错的选择！
41. B。主旨大意题。根据第一段“If you’re having trouble communicating in English, American situation comedies are one good way to help.”及以下对《飞黄腾达》和《绝望主妇》两部喜剧的简介可知，作者介绍这两部喜剧是因为它们对学英语非常有帮助。
42. A。细节理解题。根据第二段“They can not only give you a lot of information about American culture, but also offer some useful daily expressions. Watching them will help you enlarge your vocabulary and teach you correct language usage in different situations.”可知，通过看这两部喜剧，英语学习者可以了解一些美国文化、学习有用的英语正确表达和更多的单词，而A项不符合文意。
43. C。细节理解题。根据第二段“Best of all, situation comedies are a fun way to learn.”可知答案。
44. B。细节理解题。根据第三段“The American reality TV show ...”可知，《飞黄腾达》是真人电视秀。根据第三段“It’s based on the idea of the final job interview for the final job.”可排除A项；根据第三段“The show picks 16 people to compete for a job with Trump’s business.”可排除C项；这个节目是由商人Donald Trump主持的，而非关于几个商人的故事，故排除D项。
45. D。细节理解题。根据第六段“This program is good at expressing the funny life of American neighbors.”可知答案。根据第五段“Desperate Housewives is set in an invented American town, Wisteria Lane.”可排除A项；B项没有提到，故排除；根据第五段“those women live a life of lies, secrets, criminal acts, and mystery.”可知C项不符合文意。
文章大意：萨姆和杰森是好朋友。车祸后，萨姆把自己的眼睛移植给了杰森，并请求医生保守秘密。然而杰森康复后却没能一直陪伴萨姆。萨姆死后，当杰森知道萨姆对自己做出的牺牲后，懊悔不已。
46. C。推理判断题。根据文章第一段“Sam smiled and said, ‘Not bad, Doctor. Thank you for doing the operation.’”和第三段“Dear Jason, I am disabled. But I want you to be a healthy man. So I gave my eyes to you so that you can enjoy life as a healthy man.”可推知萨姆请求医生把自己的眼睛移植给了杰森，他感谢医生按照自己的意愿给他们做了手术。
47. C。细节理解题。第一段讲车祸后，萨姆把眼睛给了杰森，第二段讲杰森康复，而萨姆落下了残疾，需要朋友的时候，杰森却离开了他，第三段讲萨姆去世，杰森知道了真相，后悔不已。按照故事发生的顺序可知正确答案。
48. D。推理判断题。萨姆把双眼给了杰森，由此可推断，杰森在车祸中失明了。
49. A。推理判断题。从萨姆把自己的眼睛给了朋友的情节能看出萨姆是一个非常重视友谊的人，否则他不会做出这么大的牺牲。
50. B。词义猜测题。从第三段“Now you have new friends. I’m glad to see that you are as healthy and happy as usual.”可知杰森完全康复了，像以前一样健康。故可推知该词含义为“恢复健康”。
文章大意：方便面很方便，但是你知道吗，为了防止面条粘在一起，常常要用一种蜡涂层，经常吃方便面会导致体内蜡涂层积存过多而引发癌症。
51. B。细节理解题。根据第二段“The wax coating in the instant noodles is used to prevent the noodles from sticking together.”可知蜡涂层可以防止面条彼此粘在一起。
52. A。细节理解题。根据第三段“If you eat the instant noodles today, you’d better wait for several days before you eat instant noodles next time since our bodies need about 3 days to clear the wax coating away from our bodies.”可知身体需要大约三天才能清除体内的蜡涂层。
53. C。细节理解题。根据第三段“Do you know the consequence of having too much wax coating in our bodies? It will lead to cancer if the wax coating is stored in our bodies for a long time.”可知常吃方便面的人，体内会积存大量的蜡涂层，而过多的蜡涂层在体内积存久了就会导致癌症。
54. D。细节理解题。根据最后一段“... I still don’t think it healthy to eat them too often or too much. Why not say “No” to instant noodles and have some healthy food?”可知作者希望大家少吃方便面，多吃健康食品。
55. D。推理判断题。根据最后一段“I hope this passage will make those who enjoy eating instant noodles and eat the instant noodles often know about the hidden danger of instant noodles.”可知答案。
56. F。Zhang Qian的个人情况“... a Chinese girl and she is 23 now. She graduated from a medical college last year. She would like to find a job as a doctor or nurse”符合F的要求“Nurse Wanted Female. Aged 20—30. Being patient and able to nurse an old couple. Native Chinese only.”。
57. A。Tom的个人情况“38 years old. He has been a driver for more than ten years. He is a smart, ... and he has never caused any accidents... wants to find a full-time job as a driver.”符合A的要求“Fulltime Drivers Wanted Male. Clean drive license. Must be of smart appearance. Aged 25--45. Three years driving experience or more.”
58. E。Helen的个人情况“... 26 years old. She can type 240 words a minute and have worked as a typist for about one year in a big company. She can write down useful information quickly.”符合E的要求“Female. 20—30. Busy lawyers need an experienced secretary. Typing experience is required. Shorthand (速记) skills are necessary.”。
59. D。Mary的个人情况“... 22 years old now. She wants to work in some big restaurants ... She has one year experience as a waitress in a big restaurant.”符合D的要求“... the biggest and busiest restaurant in London is seeking food servers. Female. Aged 20—28.”。
60. B。Jane的个人情况“... 1.70 meters tall ... 25 years old. She is a Chinese native, and she can speak English and German. ... good at swimming.”满足B的要求“... be between 20 and 33 years old; height 1.65 to 1.75m; able to use two languages at least, MUST be able to swim.”。
Unit1 测试题
第一节 单项填空（共15小题；每小题1分，满分15分）
21. Mr Green was made ____ general manager of the company last week. Look, ____ new manager is coming!
A. a; the B. a; 不填
C. the; 不填 D. 不填; the
22. — Would you like me to get you a ticket for A Date With Lu Yu?
— ____.
A. Yes, but I can do it
B. No, thank you. I have got one
C. Sorry to hear that
D. Help me right now
23. Your little sister is so full of ____ that she can continue to dance and sing for long hours.
A. force B. power
C. strength D. energy
24. As far as I’m ____, he is unfit for the job.
A. concerning B. concerned
C. concern D. to concern
25. The boss of the company had ____ his friend’s advice, which led to the failure of his business.
A. disliked B. suffered
C. ignored D. discussed
26. She was so excited that it took us an hour and a half to ____ her ____.
A. calm; down B. put; down
C. bring; down D. turn; down
27. — Do you dare ____ say “no” to your boss?
— Sure. You dare not ____ say “no”
but I dare.
A. to; 不填 B. 不填; to;
C. have; to D. to; to;
28. The students asked ____.
A. when is the sports meeting going to be held
B. when the sports meeting is going to be held
C. if was the sports meeting going to be held
D. if the sports meeting was going to be held
29. — What has made Mary so ____?
— She lost her new bicycle.
A. worrying B. troublesome
C. upset D. excited
30. In warm countries, many people have their houses made almost ____ of bamboo: the walls, the roofs and the floors.
A. practically B. possibly
C. entirely D. exactly
31. Bless your heart. I know you didn’t break the vase ____. Don’t cry!
A. on purpose B. in fact
C. in general D. by mistake
32. To our surprise, there were a(n) ____ of advertising boards at the gate of the
meeting.
A. series B. lots
C. plenty D. amount
33. Although Xiao Shenyang has become very famous, people can still find him easy to ____.
A. get along
B. get through with
C. get on D. get along with
34. On my first day of school, the teacher told me that ____.
A. the world around you was always changing
B. the world around you is always changing
C. the world around us is always changing
D. the world around us was always changing
35. It was the fourth time this year that I ____ the film.
A. have seen B. had seen
C. saw D. see
第二节 完形填空（共20小题；每小题1.5
分，满分30分）
In the dining room of my grandfather’s house stood a large clock. When I was a child, the old clock 36 me very much. I was surprised at how the clock would chime (敲) three times, six times or more, with a wonderful clear 37 . I often paid attention to it instead of the foods when I had 38 . And always the clock stood like an old family friend, 39 the family. I found the clock comforting and familiar. Year after year, the clock became a part of my memories.
It was even more 40 to me when my grandfather carefully wound up (上发条) that clock with a special 41 each day. That key was 42 to me. It kept the clock
43 . It kept the clock chiming. How did it do that? I watched as my grandfather took the key from his pocket and 44 the door in the old clock and used the key to wind it up. He never let that clock wind down and
45 . When I got a little older, he taught me how to open the door, 46 let me wind up the clock myself. I remember the 47 time I did, I felt so excited ...
After my grandfather 48 , every time I saw the clock, I couldn’t help crying. Never could I see him again. The 49 on the clock were frozen. It stopped. I took the key with my 50 hand and opened the door. All of a 51 , I was a child again, watching my grandfather. He was there, smiling at me. I stood there, 52 in the memories. Then slowly and 53 , I wound up the clock. Tick-tock, tick-tock ... Life were 54 into the dining room and the house. In the image of the clock, my grandfather 55 again.
36. A. disappointed B. encouraged C. interested D. puzzled
37. A. picture B. sound C. noise D. time
38. A. meals B. homework C. dreams D. trouble
39. A. protecting B. testing C. heating D. watching
40. A. wonderful B. strange C. different D. fearful
41. A. pen B. ring C. clock D. key
42. A. small B. colorful C. beautiful D. magic
43. A. running B. standing C. speaking D. laughing
44. A. painted B. opened C. locked D. repaired
45. A. go B. play C. stop D. leave
46. A. and B. but C. or D. so
47. A. first B. last C. next D. second
48. A. slept B. died C. smiled D. returned
49. A. face B. door C. hands D. eyes
50. A. wet B. broken C. dirty D. shaking
51. A. while B. sudden C. way D. step
52. A. closed B. lost C. waited D. turned
53. A. clearly B. wrongly C. carefully D. angrily
54. A. thrown B. seen C. found D. breathed
55. A. cried B. walked C. lived D. listened
Every English learner hopes to find a patient native speaker who will politely correct mistakes and teach him some useful new vocabulary. But native speakers can be hard to find. If you’re having trouble communicating in English, American situation comedies are one good way to help.
They can not only give you a lot of information about American culture, but also offer some useful daily expressions. Watching them will help you enlarge your vocabulary and teach you correct language usage in different situations. Best of all, situation comedies are a fun way to learn.
The Apprentice
The American reality (现实) TV show is hosted by the famous businessman Donald Trump. It’s based on the idea of the final job interview for the final job. The show picks 16 people to compete for a job with Trump’s business. Those who fail their weekly tasks have to meet with Trump. They have to explain why they should not be fired (解雇).
The Apprentice is useful for English students who want to learn how to make up a persuasive (令人信服的) argument. For example, rather than say “I think I did a good job”, one may also learn to throw off the possibility of uncertainty by saying, “I did a good job.”
Desperate Housewives (DH)
Desperate Housewives is set in an invented American town, Wisteria Lane. It follows a group of middle-aged women as they go through their daily family lives. But in fact, those women live a life of lies, secrets, criminal (犯罪的) acts, and mystery.
This program is good at expressing the funny life of American neighbors. And, it’s the perfect comedy series (系列节目) for foreign learners wanting to see how to hold a relaxed daily conversation.
56. According to the passage, The Apprentice and DH are introduced because _____.
A. they are now the most popular programs
B. they are helpful in English learning
C. they are advertised for English beginners
D. they are enjoyed by most young people
57. In the author’s opinion, learning English through TV series is _____.
A. common B. difficult
C. enjoyable D. possible
58. We can learn from the passage that The Apprentice _____.
A. tells a story of school life B. is about real life
C. has 15 actors D. is about some businessmen
59. Which of the following statements about DH can we get from the introduction?
A. The story happens in a village of America.
B. The housewives join in the same job interview.
C. The women in the American town lead a life full of sadness.
D. It does well in describing an interesting neighborhood in America.
Two good friends, Sam and Jason, met with a car accident on their way home one night. The next morning, Sam woke up blind. His legs were broken. The doctor, Mr Lee was standing by his bed, looking at him with a thoughtful expression. When he saw Sam awake, he asked, “How are you feeling, Sam?” Sam smiled and said, “Not bad, Doctor. Thank you for doing the operation (手术).” Mr Lee was moved by Sam. When he was leaving, Sam said, “Please don’t tell Jason about it.” “... OK.” Mr Lee replied.
Months later when Jason’s wounds (伤) healed, Sam was still very sick. Neither could he see or walk. What he could do was just stay in his wheelchair all day long. At first, Jason stayed with him for a few days. But days later, Jason felt very discouraged and embarrassed to spend time staying with a disabled man like Sam. So he went to see Sam less and less. He made new friends. From then on, he didn’t go to visit Sam any more. Sam didn’t have any family or friends other than Jason. He felt very sad.
Things went from bad to worse. Sam died a year later. When Jason came, Mr Lee gave a letter to him. It was from Sam. In the letter Sam said, “Dear Jason, I am disabled. But I want you to be a healthy man. So I gave my eyes to you so that you can enjoy life as a healthy man. Now you have new friends. I’m glad to see that you are as healthy and happy as usual. I’m glad you live a happy life. You are always my best friend ... ... Sam”. Jason stood there. Tears ran down his face.
60. Which of the following happened according to the order of time?
a. Jason made new friends. b. Sam gave his eyes to Jason.
c. Sam and Jason were caught in a car accident.
d. Sam became disabled and needed friends.
e. Sam died and Jason knew the truth.
A. dacbe B. dcbea C. cbdae D. cdbea
61. We can infer from the passage that ____.
A. Sam drove too badly and caused the car accident
B. the unsuccessful operation led to Sam’s blindness
C. Jason knew how Sam helped him before Sam died
D. it was Jason that was made blind in the car accident
62. Sam was a man who ____.
A. thought friendship was very important
B. was unfriendly to his friends
C. felt hopeless after the car accident happened
D. always listened to his friends
63. The underlined word “healed” in the second paragraph may mean “____”.
A. was sleepy after working for a long time
B. became healthy again (after being ill)
C. felt surprised when hearing bad news
D. ran away when something bad happened
Do you like traveling? Many people choose backpacking (背着背包徒步旅行) because it not only helps save a lot of money, but also gives them another kind of experience. But do you know what should you do before you begin your backpacking？When you are planning a backpacking adventure, the first thing to do in your opinion may be the decision on the places where you will visit. However, it is not the most important thing. Great adventures will make you face great danger. Why? Often backpacking is an adventure, and you will visit strange places that you have never been to. Think about what might happen while you are traveling. Nobody knows what will happen during the trip. So you should not only imagine the enjoyment you will have on the trip, but also think about the possible danger you might face.
Making travel insurance (保险) is the most crucial. It can make sure that you stay safe on the trip. So you should buy a backpacker travel insurance policy (保险单) before you leave. Backpacker policies are specially designed to meet your needs, by offering a high level of cover for a long time of travel. You can buy a backpacker policy from one week to two years or longer time. The backpacker insurance policy covers many activities such as swim and ski, and provides protection for these activities. So buy a backpacker travel insurance policy is very important.
It is a good idea to compare a few insurance companies before you make a decision. You should always carefully check the backpacker policy and make sure the activities you want to do are all covered by the policy.
64. The passage can interest the man who ____.
A. is too busy to have a few days off
B. runs a company selling sports clothes
C. plans to go for a long walk in the country
D. wants to become a tour guide in the future
65. What would be the best title for this passage?
A. Great backpacking B. Who should take a holiday?
C. How to be a good tour guide? D. Important — backpacking insurance
66. It can be inferred from the passage that ____.
A. we should find a good tour guide when backpacking
B. a lot of people want to spend some time backpacking
C. we should take part in some activities such as swim and ski
D. backpacking insurance policies may cover sports protection
67. This passage may be taken from ____.
A. a magazine about traveling
B. a novel full of thrilling stories
C. a survey paper about life problems
D. a text book of a high school student
It is very easy to cook instant noodles （方便面） in a short time by putting the noodles into the boiling water.
However, few people know that when the instant noodles are made, wax coating (蜡涂层) will be put on the noodles. The wax coating on the instant noodles is used to prevent the noodles from sticking together.
Researches have shown that the wax coating on the noodles is quite harmful (有害的) to our health. If you eat the instant noodles today, you’d better wait for several days before you eat instant noodles next time since our bodies need about 3 days to clear the wax coating away from our bodies. Do you know the consequence (结果) of having too much wax coating in our bodies? It will lead to cancer if the wax coating is stored in our bodies for a long time.
So it is very important to wash away the wax coating on the instant noodles if we don’t want our bodies to be in danger. You can do like this: 1. Wash the instant noodles with warm water first, and then pour away the water containing the wax coating. 2. Repeat Step 1 and try to stir (搅动) the noodles to wash away the wax coating on the noodles before cooking it in a new pot of water.
I hope this passage will make those who enjoy eating instant noodles and eat the instant noodles often know about the hidden danger of instant noodles. Although the instant noodles are very easy to cook and help us save a lot of time, I still don’t think it healthy to eat them too often or too much. Why not say “No” to instant noodles and have some healthy food?
68. People use wax coating when making instant noodles to ____.
A. make the instant noodles more delicious
B. stop the noodles from sticking together
C. help keep the noodles from going bad
D. make it easy to cook the instant noodles
69. Why does the author advise people to wait for a few days before they eat instant noodles again?
A. Because the bodies need enough time to clear off the wax coating.
B. Because enjoying instant noodles will take the bodies a long time.
C. Because their bodies will need instant noodles several days later.
D. Because doing this can prevent people getting tired of instant noodles.
70. According to the passage, if people eat instant noodles too often, they will probably ____.
A. put on some weight B. save a lot of time
C. catch some illness D. save much money
71. What does the author call on people to do?
A. Have healthy food instead of instant noodles.
B. Learn how to choose the right instant noodles.
C. Take instant noodles as breakfast every morning.
D. Eat instant noodles as soon as they buy them.
We offer five kinds of courses. Each course has been designed to help students according to their needs.
Course 1: General English
General English is designed to develop students’ basic (基础的) communication skills in: Speaking and Pronunciation, Reading, Listening, Writing, Grammar and Vocabulary. Tuesday to Friday: 9:00 am to11:00 am, $288 per week.
Course 2: Academic English
Academic English is for students who want to take the IELTS exam or for those who need to use English in a professional (专业的) area. Monday to Friday: 4:00 pm to 5:00 pm, $320 per week.
Course 3: High School ESL
Why not make the most of your time studying in Australia with the help from TIES? We have High School ESL classes each week specifically designed for International Students. Tuesday to Friday: 8:00 am to11:00 am, $25 per hour.
Course 4: Night Classes
Do you want to improve your English and get the best results possible in your GRE test? We have two night classes each week designed to meet your needs. Tuesday and Thursday evenings: 8:30 pm to 10:30 pm, $60 per day.
Course 5: One on One
If you are interested in some One on One lessons with TIES teachers, we can design a curriculum (课程) to meet your needs. One on One lessons can improve your English language skills more quickly and help students who want to take TOEFL. Tuesday to Friday: 2:00 pm to 5:00 pm, $80 per hour.
72. Which course would be helpful for students who want to take the IELTS exam?
A. Course 1 B. Course 2 C. Course 3 D. Course 4
73. How much will you pay if you spend 2 weeks taking the High School ESL course?
A. $200. B. $250.
C. $350. D. $600.
74. What can we learn from One on One according to the passage?
A. It’s designed just for English beginners.
B. Its lessons are given in the morning.
C. It’s more expensive than the other courses.
D. Its lessons are designed to improve writing skills.
75. If you are only free in the morning, you may choose ____.
A. Course 1 or Course 5 B. Course 3 or Course 4
C. Course 2 or Course 4 D. Course 1 or Course 3
第一节 单词语篇填空（满分10分）
请认真阅读下列短文，按要求填出符合短文意思的正确英语单词，注意：其中有的所缺单词已给出首字母，有的已给出中文意思，有的要求考生按上下文的意思填出完整、正确形式的单词。所填单词要求拼写正确和形式符合英语写作要求，使短文通顺、流畅，并将正确答案写在试题右边的相对应的横线中。
I have welcomed each of my students in the hallway by their
names at least t____ every week for many years. 76. ____
Today a girl stopped me and handed me an e____. In it was 77. ____
a note. In the note, she thanked me for talking to her. I ____ (记得) 78. ____
asking her ____ she lived and what books she had read. This student was 79. ____
shy and ____ (沉默的). It was hard for her to get used to the new school life. 80. ____
Her note ____ (意味着) much to me and I couldn’t help crying. 81. ____
While at the same time, I was very happy because she s____ time and 82. ____
____ (精力) doing things that all students would be able to do. I think 83. ____
whenever I think about it I will smile. What a lovely g____ I received 84. ____
today ____ this student. 85. ____
第二节 书面表达 （满分25分）
假设你是新华中学的学生李明，最近从英国朋友David的来信中得知他下星期日要过十六岁生日。现在，请通过E-mail，根据下列要点用英语给他写封祝贺信：
1. 祝贺他生日快乐；
2. 感谢他两年来在英语学习方面给你的帮助；
3. 希望他在方便的时候来中国游玩。
注意：
1.可适当增加细节，使所写的短文正确、连贯；
2. 词数：100左右；
3. 开头已为你写好，不计入总词数。
Dear David,
I’m very glad to receive your letter and learn that next Sunday is your 16th birthday.
参考答案及解析
21-25 DBDBC 26-30 AADCC
31-35 AADCB 36-40 CBADA
41-45 DDABC 46-50 AABCD
51-55 BBCDC 56-60 BCBDC
61-65 DABCD 66-70 DABAC
71-75 ABDCD 76. twice
77. envelope 78. remembered
79. where 80. silent
81. meant 82. spent
83. energy 84. gift
85. from
书面表达
Dear David,
I’m very glad to receive your letter and learn that next Sunday is your 16th birthday. First, I’m very eager to join all your friends in wishing you a happy birthday. Second, as you know, it has been two years since we became friends, and you have offered me so much help with my English study. Now I’ve made great progress in my study, so I really appreciate your helping me. We helped and shared with each other during the last two years, and I hope we’ll be good friends forever. Here I’d like to wish you many Happy Returns of your birthday!
I’m looking forward to your coming to China whenever it is convenient to you.
Best wishes!
　　Yours,
Li Ming
21. D。考查冠词。表示某一团体独一无二的官衔的名词作补足语或同位语时，其前面通常不加冠词。第二空表示特指刚才提到的“这位新总经理”，应加定冠词the。
22. B。考查情景交际。首先可排除A选项，因答语前后矛盾。对这类征求对方意见的情况，首先应表明自己的态度，C和D项不符合此要求。故本题正确答案为B。
23. D。考查名词辨析。句意为“你的小妹妹是如此精力充沛以至于她能继续又唱又跳很长时间”。force“武力，力量”；power“权力”；strength“力气，力量”；energy“精力”。
24. B。考查固定搭配。as far as I’m concerned“我认为”。句意为“我认为他不适合这项工作”。
25. C。考查动词辨析。本句句意为“那个公司的老板忽视了他朋友的忠告，结果导致了他生意的失败。”dislike“厌恶”；suffer“遭受；经历”；ignore“不理睬；忽视”；discuss“讨论，论述”。根据句意可知，本题选C。
26. A。考查动词短语辨析。句意为“她如此兴奋以至于我们花了一个半小时才使她平静下来”。calm ... down意为“使平静下来”；put ... down意为“写下……”；bring ... down意为“打倒……；turn ... down意为“压低（力量、声音等）”。根据语境，A项为正确答案。
27. A。考查dare的用法。dare 敢，敢于，竟敢。在英语中，dare一词可用作情态动词，其结构是：dare (not) do sth 敢(不敢)做某事；也可用作实义动词，其结构是：dare to do sth / don’t (doesn’t/ didn’t) dare (to) do sth。由此可知，正确答案是A。
28. D。考查的是间接引语中的时态变化和语序问题。符合语法规则的只有D项。A项错在时态和语序上；B项错在时态上；C项错在语序上。
29. C。考查形容词辨析。句意为“——什么事让Mary那么不高兴？——她的新自行车丢了”。worrying意为“令人担心的“；troublesome意为“令人烦恼的”；upset意为“不高兴；烦乱的”；excited意为“兴奋的”。
30. C。考查副词辨析。句意为“在气候温暖的国家，很多人的房子几乎完全是用竹子制作的：墙、房顶和地板。”practically意为“实际地”；possibly意为“可能地”；entirely意为“完全地，彻底地”；exactly意为“恰好地”。
31. A。考查短语辨析。句意为“好了好了，我知道你不是故意把花瓶打破的。别哭了。”on purpose意为“故意”；in fact意为“事实上；实际上”；in general意为“大体上；一般而言”；by mistake意为“错误地”。根据语境，可知A项为正确答案。
32. A。考查固定搭配。句意为“让人吃惊的是，在会场门口有一连串的广告牌。a series of一连串，一系列；lots of 和plenty of前面不能再加冠词“a”，an amount of后面只能接不可数名词。根据句意可知正确答案为A。
33. D。考查get along with 的用法。本句句意为“尽管小沈阳已经很出名了，但人们仍能发现他很容易相处。”get along with 意为“与……相处”，with不可省略；get through with意为“完成”。故正确答案为D。
34. C。本题考查直接引语变间接引语。直接引语变间接引语，人称要变，故不能用you, 而要用us，而“周围的世界在不断地变化”是个真理，变间接引语时时态不变。
35. B。考查时态。It is /was the first/ second/ third time + that从句，意为“做……是第几次”，从句应用完成时态，是现在完成时还是过去完成时，取决于前面是is还是was。综上所述，本题的正确答案为B。
文章大意：童年的时候，爷爷家餐厅有一个大钟。爷爷每天都给钟上发条。爷爷去世后，钟就停了。每次看见钟，我都忍不住流泪。终于我拿起钥匙给钟上了发条，在钟的嘀嗒声中，我仿佛看见爷爷又活了过来。
36. C。由下文“我”对大钟的关注可知大钟引起了“我”浓厚的兴趣。
37. B。钟打点的时候会发出清晰的响声。
38. A。从文章第一句可知，钟摆在餐厅里，“我”常常注意钟而不是食物，因此是吃饭的时候。
39. D。结合语境，此处是拟人修辞，但钟没有“保护”、“测试”或“加热”的功效，所以这三项不符合语境，说钟“看着”我们一家人更符合这里的感情基调。
40. A。由于“我”对大钟很感兴趣，所以一切与大钟有关的事情对“我”来说都很有意思。
41. D。给钟上发条要用“钥匙”。
42. D。从下文可知，钥匙使钟报时，但是“我”小时候并不清楚钥匙是怎样做到的，所以对“我”来说，钥匙是有魔力的，是很奇妙的。
43. A。钥匙的作用就是使钟一直“走”，表示钟表“运行”可以用run。
44. B。从下文可知，要给钟上发条，先要打开钟上的小门。
45. C。爷爷每天都给钟上发条，从来没让钟停过。
46. A。上下文之间是承接关系，故此处是and。
47. A。“我”稍大一点的时候，爷爷教“我”如何打开钟上的小门，并让“我”给钟上发条，第一次给钟上发条，“我”很兴奋、很激动。
48. B。“我”每次看到大钟都忍不住哭泣，“我”再也见不到爷爷了，从语境推断，爷爷去世了。
49. C。爷爷去世了，再没有人给钟上发条，钟停下不走了，仿佛指针（hands）被“冷冻”了。
50. D。分析语境，“我”用颤抖的手拿起了钥匙。
51. B。分析语境，“我”给钟上了发条，钟开始走起来，忽然之间，“我”仿佛又回到了童年，all of a sudden = suddenly。
52. B。“我”沉浸在回忆当中，此处用B项可以表示这个意义。
53. C。“我”小心翼翼地给钟上发条。
54. D。钟又走了起来，给餐厅和整个房子带来了活力。breathe life into sth 给某事物带来活力。
55. C。钟又走了起来，给餐厅和整个房子带来了活力，我从大钟身上，看见爷爷又活了过来。
文章大意：要是你觉得自己的英语口语还有一些障碍，试试看美剧学英语吧，《飞黄腾达》和《绝望主妇》会是非常不错的选择！
56. B。主旨大意题。根据第一段“If you’re having trouble communicating in English, American situation comedies are one good way to help.”及以下对《飞黄腾达》和《绝望主妇》两部喜剧的简介可知，作者介绍这两部喜剧是因为它们对学英语非常有帮助。
57. C。细节理解题。根据第二段“Best of all, situation comedies are a fun way to learn.”可知答案。
58. B。细节理解题。根据第三段“The American reality TV show ...”可知，《飞黄腾达》是真人电视秀。根据第三段“It’s based on the idea of the final job interview for the final job.”可排除A项；根据第三段“The show picks 16 people to compete for a job with Trump’s business.”可排除C项；这个节目是由商人Donald Trump主持的，而非关于几个商人的故事，故排除D项。
59. D。细节理解题。根据第六段“This program is good at expressing the funny life of American neighbors.”可知答案。根据第五段“Desperate Housewives is set in an invented American town, Wisteria Lane.”可排除A项；B项没有提到，故排除；根据第五段“those women live a life of lies, secrets, criminal acts, and mystery.”可知C项不符合文意。
主要内容：萨姆和杰森是好朋友。车祸后，萨姆把自己的眼睛移植给了杰森，并请求医生保守秘密。然而杰森康复后却没能一直陪伴萨姆。萨姆死后，当杰森知道萨姆对自己做出的牺牲后，懊悔不已。
60. C。细节理解题。第一段讲车祸后，萨姆把眼睛给了杰森，第二段讲杰森康复，而萨姆落下了残疾，需要朋友的时候，杰森却离开了他，第三段讲萨姆去世，杰森知道了真相，后悔不已。按照故事发生的顺序可知正确答案。
61. D。推理判断题。萨姆把双眼给了杰森，由此可推断，杰森在车祸中失明了。
62. A。推理判断题。从萨姆把自己的眼睛给了朋友的情节能看出萨姆是一个非常重视友谊的人，否则他不会做出这么大的牺牲。
63. B。词义猜测题。从第三段“Now you have new friends. I’m glad to see that you are as healthy and happy as usual.”可知杰森完全康复了，像以前一样健康。故可推知该词含义为“恢复健康”。
文章大意：本文主要讲徒步旅行前应该购买旅行保险以及其重要性和注意事项。
64. C。推理判断题。本文主要讲徒步旅行前应该购买旅行保险，第一段中多次提到“traveling”、“backpacking”等徒步旅行方面的词，故可推知本文能引起打算徒步旅行的人的兴趣。
65. D。主旨大意题。本文主要讲徒步旅行前应该购买旅行保险以及其重要性和注意事项。
66. D。细节理解题。根据第二段“The backpacker insurance policy covers many activities such as swim and ski, and provides protection for these activities.”可知D正确。
67. A。推理判断题。本文主要讲徒步旅行前应该购买旅行保险以及其重要性和注意事项，这样的内容通常出现在相关的杂志、报刊上。
文章大意：方便面很方便，但是你知道吗，为了防止面条粘在一起，常常要用一种蜡涂层，经常吃方便面会导致体内蜡涂层积存过多而引发癌症。
68. B。细节理解题。根据第二段“The wax coating in the instant noodles is used to prevent the noodles from sticking together.”可知蜡涂层可以防止面条彼此粘在一起。
69. A。细节理解题。根据第三段“If you eat the instant noodles today, you’d better wait for several days before you eat instant noodles next time since our bodies need about 3 days to clear the wax coating away from our bodies.”可知身体需要大约三天才能清除体内的蜡涂层。
70. C。细节理解题。根据第三段“Do you know the consequence of having too much wax coating in our bodies? It will lead to cancer if the wax coating is stored in our bodies for a long time.”可知常吃方便面的人，体内会积存大量的蜡涂层，而过多的蜡涂层在体内积存久了就会导致癌症。
71. A。细节理解题。根据最后一段“... I still don’t think it healthy to eat them too often or too much. Why not say “No” to instant noodles and have some healthy food?”可知作者希望大家少吃方便面，多吃健康食品。
文章大意：本文介绍了几种课程，可以满足不同的英语学习者的需要。
72. B。细节理解题。根据Course 2: Academic English部分“Academic English is for students who want to take the IELTS exam ...”可知答案。
73. D。数字计算题。根据Course 3: High School ESL部分“Tuesday to Friday: 8:00 am to11:00 am, $25 per hour.”可知，这项课程每周的学费是25(美元) ×3（小时）×4（天）=300（美元），故两周的学费为300（美元）×2（周）=600（美元）。
74. C。细节理解题。根据文章内容可知，Course 1每小时的学费为：288(美元)÷4（天）÷2（小时）=36(美元)；Course 2每小时的学费为：320(美元)÷5（天）÷1（小时）=64(美元)；Course 3每小时的学费为：25(美元)；Course 4每小时的学费为：60(美元)÷2（小时）=30(美元)；Course 5每小时的学费为：80(美元)。故可知Course 5：One on One学费最高。A项没有提到，故排除；根据其授课时间可排除B项；根据“One on One lessons can improve your English language skills more quickly and help Students who want to take TOEFL.”可排除D项。
75. D。细节理解题。根据授课时间可知，只有Course 1和Course 3这两门课开在上午。
Unit 1 Friendship 改错、写作 练习
I. 单句改错 (把有错误的序号写在括号里并作订正)
1. —What did he finish doing? — Washed the clothes. ( )
A B C D
2. You should have put the bag back to the counter. It is someone else’. ( )
A B C D
3. What others do you think you should take with you? ( )
A B C D
4. During the World War II, a lot of Jews were made homeless. ( )
A B C D
5. The crazy girl also tried hard to hide her feeling. ( )
A B C D
6. I keep my diary of what I do every day. ( )
A B C D
7. On this alone island, I felt lonely, with no one talking with me. ( )
A B C D
8. What do you enjoy spending the weekend, playing basketball or seeing a film?
A B C D ( )
9. He had some trouble to find the boy’s hiding place. ( )
A B C D
10.— How about playing tennis. —Yes, I’d like it. ( )
A B C D
II. 短文改错
Mark Twain was once traveling in French. He went 1._________
on train to Dijon. He was very tired and wanted to sleep. He 2._________
asked the conductor to call him up when the train came to Dijon. 3.__________
He explained that he was a heavy sleeper. “I may shout
loudly when you will try to wake me up, but don’t take any 4.__________
notice of what I say. Just put me of the train.” 5.__________
Then Mark Twain went to sleep. When he woke up, the train
had already arrived to Paris. He thought the conductor 6..__________
had forgotten to wake him up at Dijon. He was 7.__________
very angry that he ran up to the conductor and began to shout 8.___________
at him. “I had never been so angry in my life,” he said. 9.___________
The conductor looked at him and said, “You are not half so
angry like the American whom I put off the train at Dijon.” 10.___________
III. 翻译下列句子
1. 他们正在面对面地交谈。(face)
_______________________________________________________________.
2. 根据约翰说的, 下周将有一次会议。(according)
________________________________________________________________.
3. 他早起为了赶头班车。 (in order to)
________________________________________________________________.
4. 你和你的同学相处得怎么样? (get along with)
_______________________________________________________________.
5. 我们对他的安全都很关切。 (concern)
_______________________________________________________________.
6. 你是否需要一个你可以无话不谈的朋友?
____________________________________________________________________.
7. 你近况如何?
_____________________________________________________________________.
8. 我们成为好朋友已十年了。
_____________________________________________________________________.
9. 我还没来得及回答他的第一个问题, 他又问了一个问题。
_____________________________________________________________________.
10. 我像大部分人那样记日记。
____________________________________________________________________.
IV. 书面表达
以日记的形式来记叙自己的一个生日聚会。朋友们带来了礼物祝贺。主人请大家吃饭。饭后大家唱歌，跳舞，拍照。字数： 80-100字
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
参考答案
I. 单句改错
1. C Washed→ Washing 回答时是根据上文的问题: finish washing.
2. D else’ →else’s else结尾的并非是 “s”, 因此与普通单词的所有格一样, 后加 ’s来表示。
3. B others →else 在疑问词及不定代词后表示 “其它的”通常用else, 如: anything else; other通常修饰名词, 如: other students。
4. B 去掉the “二次世界大战”有两种表达式: the Second World War或World War II。第二种表达的构成式为: 名词+基数词。再如: Unit One; Building Three。
5. D feeling →feelings feeling表示 “感情或情绪”时用复数形式。
6. A my →a keep a diary是习惯搭配 “记日记”。
7. B alone →lonely 作定语只能用lonely, 不能用alone。
8. B spending →to spend 在本句中enjoy的宾语是what, 因此后接的不再是宾语, 不能用动名词-doing, 而是表示目的的不定式to do...。
9. C to find →finding 在have some/ no trouble (in) doing...这个短语中trouble是不可数名词, 后接-doing。
10. D it →to to代替前面的动词。
II. 短文改错:
1. French—France French “法语; 法国的”; France “法国”。
2.on—by或在train前加a train是可数名词, 前加冠词。
3.call—wake call...up通常意为 “打电话; 使…想起”等, 有时意为 “叫…起床”, 但此句中意为 “叫醒”, 并且与下文的wake up相呼应, 因此用wake更好。
4.will try—try when引导的时间状语从句中用现在时代替将来时。
5. of—off off “离开”。
6. to—in / arrived→got arrive in/ at或get to “到达”。
7. 正确
8.very—so so...that “如此…以致于…”。
9. had—have 本句中是直接引语, 因此用现在完成时。
10. like—as 在否定句中用so...as或as...as (原级比较) 表示 “和…一样…”。
III. 翻译下列句子
1. They are talking face to face./ They are having a face-to face talk.
2. According to John, there is going to be a meeting next week.
3. He got up early in order to catch the first bus.
4. How are you getting along with your classmates?
5. We are all concerned about his safety.
6. Do you want a friend whom you could tell everything to?
7. How are you getting along / on recently?
8. We have been good friends for ten years.
9. He asked a second question before I could answer the first one.
10. I keep a diary as most people do.
IV. 书面表达
Saturday, June 8th,2002 Sunny
I am so happy today because today is my birthday. Now I am 16 years old. I am no longer a little girl. All my friends came to wish me a happy birthday. Everybody brought me nice gifts. We had a big dinner with a lot of dishes. After dinner, we sang, danced and took a lot of pictures. We also had a good talk. It’s so good to be with all my friends. We really had a wonderful time today.
高中新课标英语必修①Unit 1
一.单项填空
--- Mary’s got crazy and has been sent to the mental hospital. Did you tell her boss about that?
--- Yes, but I _____ her husband first.
A. should have told B. shouldn’t have told C. must have told D. needn’t have told
There was ______ time _____ Chinese used foreign oil.
A. a; when B. a; while C. /; when D. /; while
3．It was because of bad weather __________ the football match had to be put off.
A. so B. so that C. why D. that
4.---Look! The telephone is broken. Someone damaged it ________ purpose.
---That may be right. But perhaps it was broken _________ accident.
A. on; by B. by; by C. on; on D. by; on
5. What great trouble we had ___________ where his house was.
A. in finding B. to find C. find D. found
Some students have trouble _____ grammar while others have difficulty______ new words.
A. in; remember B. for; to remember C. on; remembering D. with; remembering
7． I cannot spend ________ money on the car which is ________ expensive for me.
A. too much; much too B. far too; too much
C. much too; too much D. too many; much too
8． catch the first bus, he got up very early this morning.
A. In order to B. In order that C. So as to D. So that
9. There are altogether 6 people in the room, the baby________.
A. include B. including C. included D. to include
10. The manager of the factory told us that very little ______ was made of the waste material in the past.
A. cost B. value C. use D. matter
11. There is no ______ swimming-pool in this school and the students often go to swim ______.
A. indoors; outdoors B. indoor; outdoor C. indoor; outdoors D. indoor; indoors
12. It is the first time that I _______ this kind of moon cake.
A. enjoyed B. have enjoyed C. enjoy D. enjoying
13. When was it _____ your mother showed you around the West Lake ？
A. until B. if C. which D. that
14． In the reading room , we found her _______ at a desk, with her attention ______ on a book.
A. sitting; fixing B. to sit; fixed C. seating; fixing D. seated; fixed
15．I’m glad you’ve come; I am _______ telephoning you.
A. at the point of B. to the point of C. on the point of D. in the point of
二、完型填空
The TV English has an important part in our city though it began only several years ago . During the __16__ years of operation , there was only __17__ programmes for ___18__ who wanted to___19_ English . Those English language programmes of __20__ and learning were not __21__ at all _22___ the teachers on TV talked too __23__ in Chinese on grammar or just gave some translations or __24__. Watching English on TV was __25__ as listening to the teacher in the __26_. But now the TV English has greatly __27__. There are lots of new good programmes , __28__ English on Sunday , American English , Follow Me to Science , Animal World , English News , English TV Show, Business English , Sports , MTV . Those programmes are usually so __29__ and easy to understand that more and more people enjoy watching them . They are becoming widely __30__ not only with all English learners but with the public .
( )16. A. first B. many C. past D. last
( )17. A. little B. few C. a little D. a few
( )18. A. teachers B. people C. children D. students
( )19. A. speak B. teach C. learn D. be
( )20. A. speaking B. working C. broadcasting D. teaching
( )21 .A. useful B. interesting C. important D. necessary
( )22. A. when B. if C. unless D. because
( )23. A. much B. slowly C. badly D. quietly
( )24. A. words B. explanations C. texts D. lessons
( )25. A. as good B. as much C. the same D. as helpful
( )26. A. classroom B. house C. park D. theatre
( )27. A. stayed up B. gone up C. improved D. appeared
( )28. A. expect B. such as C. thanks to D. and
( )29. A. lively B. long C. wise D. strange
( )30. A. shaken B. lovely C. rich D. popular
三.单词拼写
31.Our workmate has been in danger. We’re all c___________ about his health.
32.It made her u________ that she didn’t do well in the final exam.
33.It is dishonest to c______ your friend and they won’t believe what you say later.
34.As teenagers, you shouldn’t get into the h_____________ of smoking.
35.Could you give me some a_________ on how to learn English?
36.There is a lot of air in the l__________ snow. It can keep you warm.
37.The s_____________ in Iraq is becoming from bad to worse.
38.She is so c____________ about English that she cannot live without it.
39. The old man s__________ a bad backache after the accident happened.
40. Because of the computer, now we can c____________ with other people on the Internet.
四.短文改错.
Dear friends,
Welcome to our country. I am very glad to be you guide. 41.__________
Now, I’d like to tell you something more about the Great 42.__________
Wall of China. The Great Wall had a history of over 2000 43.__________
years. It is considered to be one of the wonder in the world. 44.__________
The Great Wall is 6000 kilometers long, 6-7meters high but 45.__________
4-5 meters wide. Today the Great Wall has become place of 46.__________
interest. And it was built by the worked people thousands of 47.__________
years ago. So the Chinese are considered to be one of the 48.__________
great and hard-working people in the world. We are all pride. 49.__________
That’s all. I wish you will enjoy your visit here. 50.__________
参考答案：
一.单项填空
1-5 AADAA 6-10 DAACC 11-15 BBDDC
二、完形填空
16-20 CDBCD 21-25 BDABC 26-30 ACBAD
三.单词拼写
31.concerned 32.upset 33.cheat 34.habit 35.advice
36.loose 37.situation 38.crazy 39. suffered 40.communicate
四.短文改错.
41. you→your 42.去掉more 43.had→has 44.wonder→wonders 45.but→and
46.place前加a 47.worked→working 48.√ 49.pride→proud 50.wish→hope
Unit 1 单元测试
一、单项填空
从A、B、C、D四个选项中，选出可以填入空白处的最佳选项
1. European football is played in 80 countries, ____ it the most popular sport in the world.
　　A. making B. makes C. made D. to make
2. While ___ along the street, I met an old friend of mine.
　　A. I walking B. was walking C. I am walking D. walking
3. ____ telephone is working here. You have to get them____.
A. Both; repaired B. Neither; repaired
C. Either; to repaired D. All; to repair
4. I told Sally how to get here, but perhaps I ___ for her.
　　A. had to write it out B. must have written it out
　　C. should have written it out D. ought to write it out
5. It’s important for us to employ a word or a phrase according to the _____ in language studies.
　　A. situation B. expression C. condition D. translation
6. Though the girl ____ to learn Japanese, she couldn’t catch up with her classmates.
　　A. made effort B. made all her efforts
　　C. took every effort D. gave her efforts
7. Mike ____ with Janet for over one year before they got married.
　　A. had fallen in love with B. had been in love
　　C. has fallen in love D. has been fallen in love
8. Many patients got a high fever when they came to the hospital, but after being ____ about a week, their temperature can be _____.
　　A. treated; normal enough B. looked; enough normal
　　C. treat; usual enough D. looked after; enough normal
9. It is believed that ____ part of the animals cannot stay alive in water at 1,500 meters below ___ sea level.
A. /; / B a; a
C. the; the D. ／; the
10. What he didn’t mean ____ you. He meant ____ you.
A. hurting; helping B. to hurt; helping
C. to hurt; to help D. hurting; to help
11. If you don’t pay ____ to the signs, you might have trouble finding my house.
　　A. look B. watch C. attention D. visit
12. As soon as he got to the office, he ___ the students’ papers.
　　A. got down to correct B. got down to correcting
　　C. set down to correcting D. sit down to correcting
13. I would love ___ to the concert last night, but I didn’t get the ticket for it.
　　A. to go B. going C. to be gone D. to have gone
14. Children should learn to _____, but they are too selfish (自私) and don’t want to play their own toys with others .
　　A. A. support B. care C. spare D. share
15. Miss Smith is a friend of______ .
　　A. Mary’s mother’s B. Mary’s mother C. Mary mother’s D. mother’s of Mary
二、完形填空
阅读下面短文，从短文后所给各题的A、B、C和D四个选项中，选出可以填入空白处的最佳选项。
You Did More Than Carry My Books
　　Mark was waking home from school one day when he noticed the boy ahead of him had dropped all of the books he was carrying, along with a baseball bat and several other things. Mark 16 down and helped the boy pick up these articles. _17 they were going the same way, he helped to carry some of them for him. As they walked Mark _18 the boy’s name was Bill, that he 19 computer games, baseball and history, that he was having a lot of _20 with his other subjects and that he had just broken 21 with his girlfriend.
　　They arrived at Bill’s home first and Mark was 22 in for a Coke and to watch some television. The afternoon passed _23 with a few laughs and some shared small talk, and then Mark went home. They _24 to see each other around school, had lunch together once or twice, and then both ended up from the same high school. Just three weeks before 25 , Bill asked Mark if they 26 talk.
　　Bill _27 him of the day years ago when they had first met. “Do you 28 wonder why I was carrying so many things home that day ?” asked Bill. “You see, I _29 out my locker because I didn’t want to leave a mess (脏乱) 30 anyone else. I had panned to run away and I was going home to 31 my things. But after we spent some time together32 and laughing, I realized that_ 33 I had done that, I would have34 a new friend and missed all the fun we would have together.
　　So you see, Mark, when you picked up my books that day you did a lot more. You 35 __my life.”
　　16. A. fell 　　　　　 B. sat 　　　 C. lay 　　　　 D. knelt
　　17. A. Although 　　 B. Since 　　　　C. After 　　　 D. until
　　18. A. discovered 　　 B. realized 　 C. said 　　　　 D. decided
　　19. A. played 　　　　 B. loved 　　　　 C. tried 　　　 D. made
　　20. A. questions 　 B. ideas 　　　　 C. trouble 　　 D. doubt
　　21. A. up 　　　　　 B. out 　　　　　 C. off 　　　　 D. away
　　22. A. called 　　　　 B. helped 　　 C. invited 　　 D. allowed
　　23. A. peacefully　 B. willingly 　　 C. freely 　　　 D. pleasantly
　　24. A. continued 　 B. agreed 　　 C. forced 　　　 D. offered
　　25. A. graduation 　　 B. movement 　 C. separation 　　 D. vacation
　　26. A. would 　　　 B. should 　　 C. could 　　　 D. must
　　27. A. demanded 　　 B. reminded 　 C. removed 　　 D. asked
　　28. A. ever 　　　　　 B. usually 　　　 C. even 　　　　 D. never
　　29. A. checked 　　 B. took 　　　 C. cleared 　　 D. put
　　20. A. over 　　　　　B. into 　　　 C. with 　　　　 D. for
　　31. A. find 　　　　　 B. pick 　　　 C. pack 　　　　 D. hold
　　32. A. talking 　　 B. playing 　　　 C. reading 　　 D. watching
　　33. A. before 　　　　 B. if 　　　　 C. while 　　　 D. as
　　34. A. forgotten 　 B. passed 　　 C. left 　　　　　 D. lost
　　35. A. helped 　　　　 B. recovered 　　 C. improved 　　 D. changed
三、阅读理解
阅读下列短文，从每题短文后所给的四个选项（A、B、C和D）中，选出最佳选项，并在答题卡上将该项涂黑。
A
Most dog owners feel that their dogs are their best friends. Almost everyone likes dogs because they try hard to please their owners. One of my favorite stories is about a dog who wanted his owner to please him.
　　One of my friends has a large German shepherd ( 牧羊狗) named Jack. Every Sunday afternoon, my friend takes Jack for a walk in the park. Jack likes these long walks very much.　　One Sunday afternoon, a young man came to visit my friend. He stayed a long time, and he talked and talked. Soon it was time for my friend to take Jack for his walk, but the visitor didn’t leave. Jack became very worried about his walk in the park. He walked around the room several times and then sat down directly in front of the visitor and looked at him. But the visitor paid no attention. He continued talking. Finally, Jack couldn’t stand it any longer. He went out of the room and came back a few minutes later. He sat down again in front of the visitor, but this time he held the man’s hat in his mouth.
　　German shepherds aren’t the only intelligent dogs. Another intelligent dog is a Seeing Eye dog. This is a special dog which helps blind people walk along the streets and do many other things. We call these dogs Seeing Eye dogs because they are the “eye” of the blind people and they help them to “see”. Seeing Eye dogs generally go to special schools for several years to learn to help blind people.
　　36. The writer tells the story about the dog Jack to show that____.
　　 A. it, like many other dogs, always tried to please its owner master
　　 B. it, unlike many other dogs, always wanted its master to please it
　　 C. it was more intelligent than many other dogs
　　 D. it was the most faithful dog of his friend’s
　　37. Jack came to sit in front of the visitor in order to____.
　　 A. please him B. be pleased
　　 C. ask him to leave immediately D. invite him for a walk
　　38. The sentence “Finally, Jack couldn’t stand it any longer.” means___.
　　 A. Jack could no longer put up with the visitor
　　 B. Jack could no longer stand but he might sit down
　　 C. Jack was very tired and wanted a rest
　　 D. Jack was very angry with the visitor
　　39. Which of the following titles would be the best for the passage?
　　 A. Dogs─A Great Help to People B. Dogs ─ Our Faithful Companions
　　 C. An Introduction to Dogs D. Famous Dogs in Germany
B
A few years ago it was popular to speak of a generation gap, a disagreement between young people and their elders. Parents said that children did not show them proper respect and obedience (服从), while children complained (抱怨) that their parents did not understand them at all. What had gone wrong? Why had the generation gap suddenly appeared? Actually the generation gap has been around for a long time. Many people argue that a gap is built into the fabric (结构) of our society.
　　One important cause of the generation gap is the chance that young people have to choose their own ways of life. In more traditional societies, when children grow up, they are expected to live in the same area as their parents, to marry people that their parents know and agree to, and to continue the family occupation (职业). In our society, young people often travel great distances for their education, move out of the family home at an early age, marry or live with people whom their parents have never met, and choose occupations different from those of their parents.
　　In our easily changing society, parents often expect their children to do better than they did: to find better jobs, to make more money, and to do all the things that they were unable to do. Often, however, the strong desire that parents have for their children are another cause of the disagreement between them. Often, they discover that they have very little in common with each other.
　　Finally, the speed at which changes take place in our society is another cause of the gap between the generations. In a traditional culture, elderly people are valued for their wisdom, but in our society the knowledge of a lifetime may become out of date overnight. The young and the old seem to live in two very different worlds, separated by different skills and abilities.
　　No doubt, the generation gap will continue to be a feature (特点) of American life for some time to come. Its causes are rooted in the freedom and changes of our society, and in the rapid speed at which society changes.
　40. The main idea of the first paragraph is that _______.
　　A. the generation gap suddenly appeared
　　B. the generation gap is a feature of modern social life
　　C. people can reduce the generation gap
　　D. many critics argue over the nature of the generation gap
　41. The word “around” in Paragraph 1 means _______.
　　A. on all sides B. near C. in every direction D. in existence
　42. In American society, young people often _______.
　　A. depend on their parents to make a life
　　B. stay with their parents in order to get a chance for higher education
　　C. seek the best advice from their parents
　　D. have very little in common with their parents
　43. Which of the following statements is true according to the passage?
　　A. Parents should be strict with their children.
　　B. The younger generation should value the older generation for their wisdom.
　　C. The generation gap is partly caused by the older generation.
　　D. The generation gap does not exist in American society.
C
When I was growing up, I was embarrassed (困惑) to be seen with my father. He was badly crippled (跛脚) and very short , and when we would walk together, his hand on my arm for balance, people would stare. I would be ashamed of the unwanted attention. If ever noticed or bothered, he never let on.
　　It was difficult to walk together-his steps slow, mine impatient-and because of that, we didn’t say much and we went along. But as we started out, he always said, “You set the pace. I will try to follow you.”
　　Our usual walk was to or from the subway (地铁), which was how he got to work. He went to work sick, and even in bad weather. He almost never missed a day, and would make it to the office even if others could not .It was a matter of pride for him.
　　When snow or ice was on the ground, it was impossible for him to walk , even with help. At such times my sister or I would pull him through the streets of Brooklyn, N. Y., on a child’s sleigh to the subway entrance .Once there, he would try to grasp handrail until he reached the lower steps that the warmer tunnel air kept ice free. In Manhattan the subway station was the basement of his office building, and he would not have to go outside again until we met him in Brooklyn on his way home.
　　When I think of it now, I am surprised at how much courage it must have taken for a grown man to suffer from shame and disability. And I am also surprised at how he did it -- without bitterness or complaint.
　　He never talked about himself as an object of pity, nor did he show any envy of the more fortunate or able. What he looked for in others was a “good heart,” and if he found one, the owner was good enough for him.
　　Now that I am older, I believe that is a proper standard (标准) by which to judge people, even though I still don’t know exactly what a “good heart” is. But I know the times I don’t have one myself.
　　He has been away many years now, but I think of him often. I wonder if he sensed my reluctance to be seen with him during our walks. If he did, I am sorry I never told him how sorry I was, how unworthy I was, how I regretted it. I think of him when I complain about my troubles, when I am envious of another’s good fortune, when I don’t have a “good heart”.
44. How did the man treat his father when he was young?
A. He helped his father happily.
B. He never helped his father.
　　C. He helped his father, but not very happily.
　　D. He only helped his father take a walk after supper.
45. As a disabled man, his father____.
A. didn’t work very hard
B. didn’t go to work from time to time
　　C. hated those who had good fortune
　　D. was happy and satisfied, and never lost hope
46. What does the word “reluctance” mean in the article? It means ___.
　　A. anger B. sadness C. happiness D. unwillingness
47. How did the father get to work usually?
　　A. By subway. B. By bus. C. By wheelchair. D. By bike.
D
From the very beginning, Martin felt that he was bound up with（与……紧紧地在一起）his lovely little patient. One day, following some tests , Betty gave the doctor a big hug（拥抱）.
　　A few months later the doctor removed not only the tumour（肿瘤）, but also the entire lower left side of Betty’s gum（牙龈）and jawbone. Because Betty was so young, Martin was hopeful that her jawbone might regenerate.
　　Within three months, Betty’s tumour grew as large as an orange, changing the natural appearance of the left side of her small, delicate （ = thin; not strong）face. Soon she couldn’t even close her mouth, and as her eating problems worsened, Betty ‘s weight dropped from 20 kilos to 15. Martin knew from experience that it might invade the brain.
　　The only other possibility was thorough radiation therapy （放射疗法）. Night after night, Betty's father gave her injection, but the tumour remained as big as ever. Then one evening.Morgan noticed that the tumour had begun to change. It was actually becoming smaller! For two months her tumour appeared to be going away for ever. In the coming months, Betty’s tumour continued to appear. She was able to eat solid food once again. Her jawbone was regenerating. The tumour was gone.
48．If Betty’s jawbone didn’t regenerate, the doctors ________ .
　　A. would rebuild her jaw
　　B. would continue the treatment
　　C. would use new medicine
　　D. could do nothing else
49．If the brain should be invaded, the result would ________.
　　A. prevent her growth
　　B. reduce her weight
　　C. cause her brain damaged
　　D. affect her eyesight
50．What did the doctors do two months later?
　　A. They continued their observations.
　　B. They gave up the operation on Betty.
　　C. They found out what caused Betty’s strange disease.
D. They declared that Betty’s strange disease was cured.
E
Ask a bachelor（单身汉） why he resists marriage even though he finds dating to be less and less satisfying. If he is honest he will tell you that he is afraid of making a commitment. For commitment is in fact quite painful. The single life is filled with fun, adventure, excitement. Marriage has such moments, but they are not its most distinguishing features.
　　Couples with infant children are lucky to get a whole night’s sleep or a three - day vacation. I don’t know any parent who would choose the word fun to describe raising children. But couples who decide not to have children never know the joys of watching a child grow up or of playing with a grandchild.
　　Understanding and accepting that true happiness has nothing to do with fun is one of the most liberating realizations. It liberates time: now we can devote more hours to activities that can genuinely increase our happiness. It liberates money: buying that new car or those fancy clothes that will do nothing to increase our happiness now seems pointless. And it liberates us from envy: we now understand that all those who are always having so much fun actually may not be happy at all.
51．According to the author, a bachelor resists marriage chiefly because ________ .
　　A. he is reluctant to take on family responsibilities
　　B. he believes that life will be more cheerful if he remains single
　　C. he finds more fun in dating than in marriage
　　D. he fears it will put an end to all his fun adventure and excitement
52．Raising children, in the author’s opinion is ________ .
　　A. a moral duty
　　B. a thankless job
　　C. a rewarding task
　　D. a source of inevitable pain
53．From the last paragraph, we learn that envy sometimes stems from ________ .
　　A. hatred　　　　　　　　　　　　B. misunderstanding
　　C. prejudice　　　　　　　　　　　D. ignorance
54．To understand what true happiness is one must ________ .
　　A. have as much fun as possible during one’s lifetime
　　B. make every effort to liberate oneself from pain
　　C. put up with pain under all circumstances
　　D. be able to distinguish happiness from fun
55．What is the author trying to tell us?
　　A. Happiness often goes hand in hand with pain．
　　B. One must know how to attain happiness.
　　C. It is important to make commitments.
　　D. It is pain that leads to happiness.
四、短文改错
此题要求改正所给短文中的错误。对标有题号的每一行做出判断：如无错误，在该行右边横线上画一个勾（√）；如有错误（每行只有一个错误），则按下列情况改正：
该行多一个词：把多余的词用斜线（）划掉，在该行右边横线上写出该词，并也用斜线划掉。
该行缺一个词：在缺词处加一个漏字符号(^)，在该行右边横线上写出该加的词。
该行错一个词：在错的词下划一横线，在该行右边横线上写出改正后的词。
注意：原行没有错的不要改。
Dear Ralph,
I’m a newcomer here of a small town. I would 56. _______
describe myself as shy and quietly. Before my classmates, 57. _______
it seems always difficult for me to do things well as 58. _______
them. I'm sure they will laugh to me and see me as 59. _______
a fool. So I feel unhappy every day. 60. _______
Besides, I have few friends. I don't know that they 61. _______
don't like to talk with me. Sometimes, we talked to each other 62. _______
very well in class, but after class we become stranger at 63. _______
once. I am trying to improve the situation since it doesn’t 64. _______
seem to work. Can you tell me about what I should do? 65. _______
Yours,
Xiao Wei
五、书面表达
假如你是一名中学生，叫李晓华，请根据下表内容用英语写信给某报社Just ask栏目的主持人Ralph。请求帮助解决一个长期困扰你的问题。
你的情况： 1、学习成绩好。2、爱母亲。3、有点害怕母亲。
你母亲的情况： 1、大学教授，工作勤奋。很少有时间和你说话。2、对你很严，易发脾气。
你的问题：1、很少交流。2、希望互相了解。3、不知如何沟通。
注意：词数100左右；参考词汇：发脾气lose one's temper
Dear Ralph,
I'm a middle school student. ____________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________.
　 I do hope we’ll be closer. What can I do?
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　Yours sincerely,
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　Li Xiaohua
答案祥解
一、1. 选A。 现在分词作结果状语，表达意料之中或必然的结果。
2. 选D。 本题考查了省略。在时间状语从句、条件状语从句和让步状语从句中，如果主句的主语与从句的主语一致，谓语含有动词be，经常采用省略的形式，如He never speaks to anyone unless (he is ) spoken to. A, B句子结构错误；C时态错误。
3. 选 B。 本句的意思是“两部电话都坏了，我们要找人修一下。”第一空neither作定语，修饰telephone；第二空运用了get sth. done的搭配。
4. 选C。 该题中 should have done表示“过去本应该做某事，而实际上没有做”。 该题的意思是“我告诉Sally怎么到这儿， 可是我本应该为她写出这里的详细地址。”表达了一种懊悔的心情。
5. 选A。 situation位置；形势；处境；expression表情；词语；表达；condition条件；状况；translation翻译；调换。
6. 选B。 make all one’s efforts为固定搭配，意思是“某人尽全力”。
7. 选B。 fall in love不可以跟表示一段时间的短语。因此用be in love这一结构。3.C 从前句You’re lucky enough推知说话人羡慕“你”的工作。在这里envy后跟了双宾语。 其它答案不合题意。
8. 选A。 treat在这里是“治疗”的意思，normal意思是“正常的”，为形容词，因此enough要放在它的后面。
9. 选A。 本题考查冠词的用法。题意是“据说一部分动物不能生活在海平面以下一千五百米处的水里”。part of (一部分)与sea level (海平面；海拔)习惯上不加冠词，故答案为A。
10. 选D。 本题考查mean后接非谓语动词的区别。mean doing译为“意味着，意思是”；mean to do译为 “想要做……打算做……”。本句意为“他所做的并不意味着伤害你，他是想要帮助你”。
11. 选C。 pay attention to 的意思是“注意；留心”。
12. 选B。 get down to意思是“着手某事”，其中to是介词，后跟名词或动名词。
13. 选D。 A有较大干扰性，would love to do意思是“打算做某事”，表达想法；would love to have done表示“本打算做某事，然而没有做成”。
14. 选D。本题考查动词词意辨析。根据句意，说话人认为孩子们应该学会与人分享。
15. 选A。 a friend of Mary’s mother’s玛丽妈妈的一位朋友，在of后要加名词所有格，应注意英语这种双重所属的用法。
二、16. 选D。 从后面的and helped the boy pick up these articles我们可以看出Mark跪下来(knelt down)把书拣起来。
17. 选B。 they were going the same way是 he helped to carry some of them for him的原因之一，因此用since。
18. 选A。 在他们一起走的时候，Mark得知这个孩子叫Bill，……。 B有一定的干扰性，realize的意思是“领会；认识”，与后面的name不搭配。
19. 选B。 与后面的that he was having a lot of 40 (trouble)with his other subjects对比，他喜欢computer games, baseball and history。
20. 选C。 四个答案中只有trouble能说明他其他课程的情况。
21. 选A。 也许其他课程学得不好以及与女朋友刚刚分手是他不想上学的原因。break up with sb.意思是“与某人断交”。
22. 选C。 从空后的for a Coke and to watch some television我们知道Bill把Mark邀请到了自己的家。
23. 选D。 从空后的with a few laughs and some shared small talk得知他们过得很愉快。
24. 选A。 之后他们继续(continued)见了几次。
25. 选A。 从and then both ended up from the same high school我们知道他们就要毕业了，在毕业前，……。
26. 选C。 could在这里表示“请求”。
27. 选B。 Bill向Mark提起了几年前的那一天。从空后的of the day years ago得出此答案。remind sb. of sth. 意思是“向某人提起某事”。
28. 选A。 “这些年来，你是否曾想知道那天我为什么要抱这么多的东西回家吗？”ever在这里的意思是“曾经”。
29. 选C。 从空后的because I didn’t want to leave a mess我们知道，Bill清理(cleared out)自己的抽屉。
30. 选D。 “我不想把脏乱留给别人。”leave sth. for sb.意思是“把某物留给某人，并成为他的所有”。C有一定干扰性，leave sth. with sb.意思是“把某物留给某人，让其为自己或别人保管”。
31. 选C。 因为I had panned to run away，因此“我”回家打点行李。
32. 选A。 从前面的The afternoon passed 43 (pleasantly)with a few laughs and some shared small talk得此答案。
33. 选B。 联系全句，I had done that是条件。
34. 选D。 lost a new friend与后面的and missed all the fun we would have together顺接。
35. 选D。 You changed my life是You Did More Than Carry My Books的内涵。
三、36. 选B。 细节题。从第一段最后一句“One of my favorite stories is about a dog who wanted his owner to please him”得此答案。
37. 选C。 推理题。从文中“He sat down again in front of the visitor, but this time he held the man’s hat in his mouth”我们可以推知，狗给他拿来帽子，是想催他走。
38. 选。 句意理解题。在这里stand和put up with都是“忍受；忍耐”的意思。
39. 选B。 A, C均具有较大干扰性。从讲的故事看，狗仅仅是与人为伴，并不能说对人类有巨大帮助；C的题目太大而广，不能说明本文的中心。
40. 选B。 这是全文的主旨。
41. 选D。 词义理解题。联系上下文，我们可以得知，作者认为这种“代沟”已经存在了很长时间。
42. 选D。 细节题。从“they discover that they have very little in common with each other”得此答案。
43. 选C。 推理题。联系全文，我们知道作者认为，出现“代沟”是因为父母的思想跟不上时代。
44. 选C。细节题。从and when we would walk together, his hand on my arm for balance, people would stare. I would be ashamed of the unwanted attention 我们得知，在我们一起外出时，“我”会给他一些帮助，但是见到人盯着看时，“我”又极不好意思。
45. 选D。判断题。从He never talked about himself as an object of pity, nor did he show any envy of he more fortunate or able我们得知，my father 从不因自己的残疾而自暴自弃，因此D为最佳答案。
46. 选D。词义意理解题。本词所在句是照应前文的一句。在前文When I was growing, I was embarrassed to be seen with my father中的embarrassed就是指，因为“我”父亲的残疾，“我”不愿意与他一起出现在众人面前。因此本词意为“不乐意”。
47. 选A。细节题。从第四段At such times my sister or I would pull him through the streets of Brooklyn, N. Y., on a child’s sleigh to the subway entrance得此答案。
48. 选C。短文第二段内容
49. 选D。最后一段内容
50. 选B。最后一段倒数第三句
51. 选A。提示：本文是一篇议论文，阐述了幸福的获得这一严肃话题，试图澄清人们在幸福问题上的一些误解。本题要求学生判断单身汉拒绝结婚的主要原因。依据文章第3段第1行“Ask a bachelor why he resists marriage even though he finds dating to be less and less satisfying. If he is honest he will tell you that he is afraid of making a commitment”（……害怕作出对义务的承诺，即不愿承担义务）。A项与之等同，故正确。
52. 选C。提示：依据文章第4段第1句“带有婴儿的父母要是能睡上一整晚觉或度一个三天的假日，那真是太幸运了。在我认识的人中，不会有人用fun（好玩）来描述他们抚养孩子的感受”，似乎会认为作者的意图是B项（出力不讨好，毫无回报的事）或D项（不可避免的痛苦来源）。实际上，作者真实想法应在第2句中体现：但是决定不生孩子的夫妻永远也体会不到看着孩子成长以及和孙子玩耍的那种乐趣、那种欣喜。这种乐趣、欣喜实际就是一种回报。所以选项C正确。
53. 选B．提示：依据文章最后一句“And it liberates us from envy：we now understand that all those who are always having so much fun actually may not be happy at all.”说明：我们现在的这种理解就可免除嫉妒，那么反过来，嫉妒产生于我们的理解不当，即misunderstanding，故选项B正确。
54. 选D。提示：依据文章第1段第1句“The way people hold to the belief that a fun-filled, pain free life equals happiness actually reduces their chances of ever attaining real happiness”（人们坚持充满趣味、毫无痛苦的生活就等于幸福这一信条实际上减少了他们获得真正幸福的可能性）。再依据文章最后一句“…all those who are always having so much fun actually may not be happy at all”（……生活中总是有如此多的fun的人实际上也许一点都不幸福）。可以看出要理解真正的幸福是什么就必须把fun和happiness区分开来。因为两者绝不等同。故选项D正确。C项应该是回答“怎样才能获得真正的幸福”这一问题，且作者并没在文中明确提到获得快乐就必须在任何情况下都忍受痛苦。
55. 选A。提示：作者的意图出现在第1段最后一句：“But in fact，the opposite is true：more often than not things that lead to happiness involve some pain”（……事实上，导致你幸福的事情多半伴随着痛苦），故选项A符合题意。
四、56. of改为from。自己“来自于”小镇。
57. quietly改为quiet。与shy并列。
58. well前加as。as…as原级比较。
59. to改为a。Iaugh at sb.，嘲笑某人。
60. 正确。
61. that改为why。我知道他们不喜欢同我谈话，但我不知道为什么。
62. talked改为talk。整个短文谈的是现在的事，所以要用一般现在时。
63. stranger改为strangers。
64. since改为but。表转折，而不是原因或时间状语。
65. 去掉about。Tell 可接双宾语。
五、One possible version
Dear Ralph,
　　I'm a middle school student. I'm writing to tell you my problem which has troubled me for a long time. It is the relationship between my mother and me. My mother is a university professor, who works very hard. She is strict with me, but she is so busy with her work that she finds little time to talk to me. I love her and I do well in my studies, but I still feel a little afraid of her because she loses her temper easily. I don't know how to communicate with her. Maybe it's because we have seldom sat down and exchanged our feelings and thoughts . I hope we can know more about each other and understood each other better. I do hope we'll be closer. What can I do?
　　Looking forward to your reply.
　　Best wishes!
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　Yours sincerely,
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　Li Xiaohua
直接引语和间接引语练习
I.?请选出正确的答案：?1. “You’ve already got well, haven’t you?” she asked. →She asked ________.　　A. if I have already got well, hadn’t you?　　B. whether I had already got well　　C. have I already got well
D. had I already got well.2. He asked , “ Are you a Party member or a League member?”　　→He asked me _________.　　A. am I a Party member or a League member?　　B. was I a Party member or a League member　　C. if I was a Party member or a League member　　D. whether was I a Party member or a League member.3. He asked, “How are you getting along?” →He asked _______.　　A. how am I getting along?　　B. how are you getting along　　C. how I was getting along?　　D. how was I getting along4. He asked me ________ with me.　　A. what the matter is B. what the mater was　　C. what’s the matter D. what was the matter5. He said, “Don’t do that again.” He _____ me _______ that again.　　A. said to me; not to do B. said to me; don’t do　　C. told me; don’t do D. told me; not to do6.?Can?you?make?sure?___________? A.?that?he?will?come?here?today? B.?when?he?will?come?here?today C.?will?he?come?here?today? ?D.?whether?will?he?come?here?today7.?Do?you?happen?to?know?________? A.?where?is?her?address?? ?B.?in?which?place?is?her?address C.?what?her?address?is??? ?D.?the?place?her?address?is8.?Excuse?me,?but?can?you?tell?me?___________? A.?where?can?I?get?to?the?library? B.?where?I?can?get?to?the?library C.?how?can?I?get?to?the?library? ?D.?how?I?can?get?to?the?library9.?John?asked?me?_______?to?visit?his?uncle’s?farm?with?him. A.?how?would?I?like??? ?B.?if?or?not?would?I?like C.?whether?I?would?like? ??D.?which?I?would?like10.?I’d?like?to?know?________?Chinese. A.?when?he?began?to?learn? ?B.?when?did?he?begin?to?learn C.?when?did?he?begin?learning ?D.?for?how?long?he?began?to?learn
II.?将下列句子变为间接引语：?1.?“You?should?be?more?careful?next?time,”?his?father?said?to?him.
2.?Mr. Wang?said, “I?will?leave?for?Shanghai?on?business?next?month,?children”
3.?“I?haven’t?heard?from?my?parents?these?days,”?said?Mary.
4.?The?geography?teacher?said?to?us,?“The?moon?moves?around?the?earth?and?the?earth?goes?round?the?sun.”
5.?She?said?to?him,?“It’s?time?that?you?left?here.”
6.?Zhang?Hong?said?to?me,?“Doctor?Wang?passed?away?in?1948.”
7.?John?said?to?his?parents,?“I?had?learned?500?Chinese?words?by?the?end?of?last?term.”
8.?The?history?teacher?said?to?them,?“The?Chinese?Communist?Party?was?founded?on?July?1st?,?
1921.”
9.?He?said,?“Are?you?a?student?”
10.?“Have?you?anything?interesting?I?can?read,?George?”?she?said.
11.?“She’s?here?to?ask?for?help,?isn’t?she?”?he?asked.
12.?“Where?are?you?going?”?the?father?asked?his?son.
13.?“Are?you?sorry?for?what?you?have?done?” the?mother?asked?the?naughty?boy.
14.?She?said,?“Did?you?meet?this?man?at?the?station?two?hours?ago,?Mr.?Li?”
15.?“Write?your?names?on?your?papers?first,”?the?teacher?said?to?us.
16.?“Please?come?here?again?tomorrow,”?her?friend?said?to?her.
17.?“Let?me?pack?the?parcel?for?you,”?he?said.
18.?“Don’t?make?so?much?noise?in?class,?boys?and?girls,”?said?the?teacher.
19.?“What?a?lovely?day?it?is!”
20.?“Happy?New?Year?to?you!”?he?said.
III.?把下列句子变为直接引语：?1.?I?told?him?that?I?had?lost?my?money?and?that?I?would?find?it.
2.?She?asked?whether?I?would?be?free?the?next?day?or?not.
3.?I?asked?her?where?she?was?going?and?what?she?was?going?to?do?the?next?day.
4.?His?father?told?him?not?to?climb?that?high?tree?in?his?new?coat.
5.?The?stranger?asked?me?what?my?name?was.
6.?She?said?that?she?would?finish?her?work?the?next?day.
7.?The?teacher?asked?if?we?could?do?it.
8.?The?commander?ordered?his?men?not?to?cross?the?river?before?dawn.
9.?My?teacher?asked?whether?he?was?coming.
10.?The?scientist?asked?me?what?I?was?doing.
答案I.?1~5??B?C?C?D?D??????6~10??A?C?D?C?AII.?
1.?His?father?told?him?that?he?should?be?more?careful?the?next?time.2.?Mr.?Wang?told?the?children?that?he?would?leave?for?Shanghai?on?business?the?next?month.3.?Mary?said?that?she?hadn’t?heard?from?her?parents?those?days.4.?The?geography?teacher?told?us?that?the?moon?moves?around?the?earth?and?the?earth?goes?round?the?sun.5.?She?told?him?that?it?was?time?that?he?left?there.6.?Zhang?Hong?told?me?that?Doctor?Wang?passed?away?in?1948.7.?John?told?his?parents?that?he?had?learned?500?Chinese?words?by?the?end?of?last?term.8.?The?history?teacher?told?them?that?the?Chinese?Communist?Party?was?founded?on?July?1st,?1929.?He?asked?whether?I?was?a?student.10.?She?asked?George?if?he?had?anything?interesting?she?could?read.11.?He?asked?whether?she?was?there?to?ask?for?help?or?not.12.?The?father?asked?his?son?where?he?was?going.13.?The?mother?asked?the?naughty?boy?if?he?was?sorry?for?what?he?had?done.14.?She?asked?Mr.?Li?whether?he?had?met?that?man?at?the?station?two?hours?before.15.?The?teacher?told?us?to?write?our?names?on?our?papers?first.16.?Her?friend?asked?her?to?go?there?again?the?next/?following?day.17.?He?offered?to?pack?the?parcel?for?me.18.?The?teacher?told?the?boys?and?girls?not?to?make?so?much?noise?in?class.19.?He/?She?exclaimed?that?it?was?really?a?lovely?day.20.?He?wished?me?a?Happy?New?Year.
III.?
1.?I?said?to?him,?“I?have?lost?my?money?.?I?will?find?it.”2.?She?asked?,?“?You?will?be?free?tomorrow,?won’t?you?”3.?I?asked?her,?“Where?are?you?going?and?what?are?you?going?to?do?tomorrow?”4.?His?father?said,?“Don’t?climb?this?high?tree?in?your?new?coat.”5.?The?stranger?asked,?“?What’s?your?name?”6.?“I’ll?finish?my?work?tomorrow,”?she?said.7.?The?teacher?asked,?“Can?you?do?it??”8.?The?commander?ordered?his?men,?“Don’t?cross?the?river?before?dawn.”9.?My?teacher?asked,?“Is?he?coming?”10.??The?scientist?asked?me,?“What?are?you?doing?”
英语单元练习一（Book One Unit One）
一、动词的时态和语态
I can’t see any coffee in this cupboard. _______________?
A.Has it all been finished B. Was it all finished ?
C. Has it all finished ? D. Did it all finish?
2. _What’s wrong with your coat ?
___Just now when I wanted to get off the bus, the man next to me __________on it.
A. sat B. had sat C. had been sitting D. was sitting
3.___How are the team playing?
___They are playing well. But one of them_______ hurt.
A. got B. gets c. are D. were
4. I wonder why Jenny ____ us recently. We should have heard from her by now.
A. hasn’t written B. doesn’t write C. won’t write D. hadn’t written
5___You haven’t said a word about my new coat, Brenda. Do you like it?
____I’m sorry, I ______anything about it sooner. I certainly think it’s pretty on you.
A. wasn’t saying B. don’t say C. won’t say D. didn’t say.
6. My uncle ________ until he was forty-five.
A. married B. didn’t marry C. was not marrying D. would marry
7.____When will you come to see me, Dad?
___ I’ll go to see you when you __________ the training course.
A. will have finished B. will finish C. are finishing D. finish
8____ You were out when I dropped in at your house.
____Oh, I _________for a friend from England at the airport.
was waiting B. had waited C. am waiting D. have waited
9.____I hear Jane has gone to the Holy Island for her holiday.
_____Oh, how nice! Do you know when she _____?
A. was leaving B. had left C. has left D. left
10. ___ Has Sam finished his homework today?
___I have no idea. He ____it this morning.
A. did B. has done C. was doing D. had done
11. I____ you not to move my book________now I can’t find it.
A. asked B. ask c. was asking D. had asked
12.____Are you still busy?
___Yes, I _____ my work , and it won’t take long.
just finish B. am just finishing C. have just finished D. am just going to finish.
13.__If the traffic hadn’t been so heavy, I could have been back by 6 o’clock.
___What a pity! Tina ________here to see you.
A. is B. was C. would be D. has been
14. ___did you tell Julia about the result?
____Oh, no, I forgot. I ____ her now.
A. will be calling B. will call C. call D. am to call
15. He works in a factory now, but he __________ on a farm for 20 years.
A. worked B. has worked c. had worked D. had been working
16. I wonder if he __________ us, but if he_________, we will be able to complete the work ahead of time.
A. will help; does B. helps; will C. helps: does D. will help: helps
17. They asked me to have a drink with them. I said that it was at least 10 years since I ______________a good drink.
A. had enjoyed B. was enjoying C. enjoyed D. had been enjoying
18. hello, I __________ you _____ in London. How long have you been here?
A. had enjoyed b. was enjoying C. enjoyed d. had been enjoying
19.__ Oh， it’s you. I＿＿you.
__ I’ve just had my hair cut, and I’m wearing new glasses.
A. didn’t recognize B. hadn’t recognized C. haven’t recognized D. don’t recognize
20.__ You are drinking too much.
__Only at home. No one ___ me but you.
A. is seeing B. had seen C. sees D. saw
21．The person we spoke to ___ no answer at first.
A. make B. making C. makes D. made
22. Time should be made good use of ____________ our lessons well.
A.learning B. learned C. to learn D.learns
23. We _________ the last bus and didn’t have any money for taxi, so we had to walk home.
A. reached B. lost C. missed D. caught
二、翻译下面单词和短语
胆敢_________________ 11. 生气___________________
使平静_______________ 12. 关心___________________
嘲笑_________________ 13. 记下___________________
经历_________________ 14. 对…狂热_______________
户外_________________ 15. 不睡觉 ________________
根据_________________ 16. 碰巧 __________________
一系列_______________ 17. 故意地 ________________
感激_________________ 18. 面对面 ________________
交流_________________ 19. 忽视 __________________
10．加起来_______________ 20. 放好___________________
三、用以上单词和短语填空
1. The children have been indoors all day. Let them play _____________ for a while.
2. The man saved the girl from the fiver and her mother was very _______________.
3. I wonder if it’s because I haven’t been able to be outdoors for so long that I’ve grown so ____________________ everything to do with nature.
4. This ____________________ of readers is very interesting.
5. Make the following survey. _____________ your score and see how many points you can get.
6 . Please use the word to make a sentence __________________ the situation given.
7. When it was so warm, I stayed awake __________________ until half past eleven one evening in order to have a good look at the moon for once by myself.
8. After the big earthquake, people hardly _____________hope that their families were still alive.
四、完成句子
1．我听了老师的建议，买了一部英英词典。
___________________________________ bought an English-English dictionary.
2．由于多年犯有心脏病，怀特教授无论到哪里都要随身带药。
___________________________________________, Professor White must take some medicine with him wherever he goes.
3．还有一次，就在几个月前的一天晚上，我碰巧在楼上，窗户是开着的。
Another time some months ago, _________________________ when the window was open.
4．妈妈问他穿这么多衣服是不是很热。
Mum asked whether she was very hot ________________________________
5．由于天气不好，走俏足球比赛不得不推迟。
______________________________ that the football match had to be postponed.
6．你会告诉你的朋友你很关心他，但是你得去上课。
You will tell your friend _________________________but you have to go to class.
7. 不要嘲笑他，有时候你做得还不如他好。
______________________. Sometimes you are not able to do as well as he (does).
8. 我不愿像大多数人那样在日记中记流水帐。
I don’t want to _____________________________________ as most people do.
五、句子翻译
1. 他们躲在那里差不多两年，从来不敢出来。(dare)
___________________________________________________________________
2．我们试图使他平静下来，但他仍不停地叫着。(calm down)
___________________________________________________________________
3．在20世纪前，中国经历了太多的战争。(go through)
___________________________________________________________________
4．琼斯先生单独一人生活，常常感到孤独。(lonely: alone)
___________________________________________________________________
5．我们通过网络互相交流。(communicate with)
___________________________________________________________________
6．你的朋友来上学时心情很不好。(upset)
___________________________________________________________________
7．这是我一年半以来第一次目睹夜晚。(It is…that …)
___________________________________________________________________
8．犹太人被纳粹兵抓住并关押起来。(put away)
___________________________________________________________________
六、书面表达
（一）写前热身: 翻译或完成句子。
1.叫某人干某事________________________
2.向某人解释某事______________________
3.给答案让某人抄________________________
4.学生考试时作弊是不对的_____________________
5.诚实比分数更重要____________________
（二）实战操练: 在上周一次英语考试中你的朋友李红不会答题，想偷看你的答案作弊的情况，请写一篇短文，描述事情的经过和你的反应及事后的解释。
注意：1.可以适当增添细节 2.词数：100左右。
高一英语单元复习练习一
一。翻译下面单词和短语
1. dare 2. calm down 3. laugh at 4. go through 5. outdoors 6. according to
7. a series of 8 grateful 9. communicate 10. add to 11. upset 12. be concerned about
13. set down 14. be crazy about 15. stay awake 16. happen to 17. on purpose
18. face to face 20. put away
二。用以上单词和短语填空。
1. outdoors 2. grateful 3. crazy about 4. series 5. Add to 6. according to
7. on purpose 8. dared
三。完成句子。
1. I followed my teacher’s advice and
2. Having suffered from heart trouble for years
3. I happened to be upstairs one evening
4. with so many clothes on
5. It was because of the bad weather
6. that you are concerned about her
7. Don't laugh at him
8. set down a series of facts in a diary
四。句子翻译
1.They hid there for almost two years and never dared go out.
2 We tried to calm him down, but he kept shouting.
3. In the early 20th century, China went through too many wars.
4 Mr Jones lives alone and often feels lonely.
5 We communicate with each other by Internet / through the Internet.
6. Your friend come to school very upset.
7. It was the first time in a year and half that I’d seen the night face to face.
8. Jews were caught by Nazis and put away.
五、
We had an English exam last week. When I was busy doing my exercises, my friend, Li Hong wanted to cheat in the exam by looking at my paper. I felt it wrong at that moment. It is dishonest if I let her do it. But we are good friends, so how can I say no when she asks for help. In my opinion, honesty is more important than the score. Therefore, I finally did not show her my answers. After the exam, I explained to Li Hong why I refused her at that time. She accepted my explanation and we are good friends again.
1. 他们躲在那里差不多两年，从来不敢出来。
1.They hid there for almost two years and never dared go out.
2．我们试图使他平静下来，但他仍不停地叫着。
2 We tried to calm him down, but he kept shouting.
3． 不要嘲笑他，有时候你做得还不如他好。
3 Don't laugh at him. Sometimes you are not able to do as well as he (does).
4．在20世纪前，中国经历了太多的战争。
4. In the early 20th century, China went through too many wars.
5．孩子们一天没出门，让他们出去一会吧。
5 The children haven't been outdoors (have been indoors) all day. Let them play outdoors for a while.
6．请根据所给情境用这个词造句。
6 Please use the word to make a sentence according to the situation given.
7．这套读物非常有趣。
7 This series of readers is very interesting.
8．这位男子把那女孩从河里救了出来，女孩的母亲十分感激。
8 The man saved the girl from the fiver and her mother was very grateful.
9．琼斯先生单独一人生活，常常感到孤独。
9 Mr Jones lives alone and often feels lonely.
10．我们通过网络互相交流。
10 We communicate with each other by Internet / through the Internet.
11．完成下面的调查，将你所得的分数加起来，看看你能得到多少分。
11. Make the following survey. Add up your score and see how many points you can get.
12．你的朋友来上学时心情很不好。
12. Your friend come to school very upset.
13．你会告诉你的朋友你很关心他，但是你得去上课。
13. You will tell your friend that you are concerned about her but you have to go to class.
14．我不愿像大多数人那样在日记中记流水帐。
14. I don’t want to set down a series of facts in a diary as most people do.
15．我不知道这是不是因为我长久无法出门的缘故，我变得对一切与大嚷嚷自然有关的事物都无比狂热。
15. I wonder if it’s because I haven’t been able to be outdoors for so long that I’ve grown so crazy about everything to do with nature.
16．当天气很暖和，我熬到11点半，故意不睡觉，为的是独自好好看看月亮。
16. When it was so warm, I stayed awake on purpose until half past eleven one evening in order to have a good look at the moon for once by myself.
17．还有一次，就在几个月前的一天晚上，我碰巧在楼上，窗户是开着的。
17. Another time some months ago, I happened to be upstairs one evening when the window was open.
18．这是我一年半以来第一次目睹夜晚。
18. It was the first time in a year and half that I’d seen the night face to face.
19．犹太人被纳粹兵抓住并关押起来。
19. Jews were caught by Nazis and put away.
20．妈妈问他穿这么多衣服是不是很热。
20. Mum asked whether she was very hot with so many closes on.
21．我听了老师的建议，买了一部英英词典。
21. I followed my teacher’s advice and bought an English-English dictionary.
22. 大地震过后，人们几乎不敢希望他们的家人还活着。
22．After the big earthquake, people hardly dared hope that their families were still alive.
23．由于天气不好，走俏足球比赛不得不推迟。
23. It was because of the bad weather that the football match had to be postponed.
24．由于多年犯有心脏病，怀特教授无论到哪里都要随身带药。
24. Having suffered from heart trouble for years, Professor White must take some medicine with him wherever he goes.
请根据以下任务说明和写作要求，写一150词方右的英涪短文。
[任务要求]
你应邀做题为“如何交友?”的发言，在发言之前，你要合阅相关资料，并准备发言的书面材料。清认真阅读下面短文，然后完成以下任务：
1．概括短文内容要点，该部分的字数大约60—80；
2．就“如何交友?”这一主题发表你的看法，至少包含以／的内容要点，该部分的字数大约60——80：
以自己的亲身体验为例，说明一个好朋友至少有以下特点
(1)要真诚待人。
(2)不仅分享快乐，更要分担痛苦。
(3)要助人为乐。
(4)要有本事。
(5)不要在背后说别人的坏话。
Richard, 11 "I want to make friends, but I don't know how. In my last school I was bullied and
kicked around and didn't have any friend. The kids at this school seem to be OK, but I just know 1'll do something wrong. Help."
Funny, isn't it that we just think everyone knows how to make friends? A lot of people don't and I have even found that some bullies end up bullying because they don't know what to do either. Then they get stuck with the label of bully and don't know how to change.
Perhaps the best way to think about making friends is to decide what makes a friend. I asked a group of 13-year-old boys and girls to come up with a list of what they liked about their friends. They said what a good friend was like as mentioned below:
1) go around with a pleasant expression on their face
2) are kind
3) ask, not demand, to join in
4) offer to help others with work or carrying things
5) invite people to do something
6) hang around places where other students are
7) are welcoming to new students
8) are good at thinking of something interesting to do
9) are willing to share
10) are humorous and tell jokes
11) are fair
12) are good at organizing games or activities
Every one needs friends. However, some of them don't know how to make friends and what they should do with this matter. Some usually make bullies on others, which ends their friendship between them. Some one thinks the best way to think about making friends is to decide what makes a friend. He had a survey and listed out 12 items such as "go around with a pleasant expression on their face", which can make a friend. I quite agree with him. I myself have had the experience of making friends. I used to concerned only about myself and be rude to others, which led to my having few friends. Later I know if I want to get some one to be friendly to me, I should be friendly to him first. Therefore, if we want to make friends with others, we bad better reat others well and fairly. Just what people say, "A friend in need is a friend indeed." we should share unhappiness with our friends as well as happiness. We should have some ability and be ready to help them. Remember never to speak iii words behind others.
部所给信息内容。 要求：
1．标题：A Man from the State Of Zheng Bought
Shoes。
2．必须使用5个句子介绍全部所给内容。
3．将五个句子组织成连贯的短文。
郑人量脚往集市买鞋，忘带尺寸，回家取，
再来，集市已散。人问“何不以脚试鞋?”答“宁
信尺寸，不信自己的脚。”(尺寸measurement)
A Man from the State of Zheng Bought Shoes nce upon a time, a man in the state of Zheng ent to the market to buy a pair of shoes. Before he eft for the market, he had measured his feet with a iece of straw. However, he couldn't find the measure ecause he had left it at home. So he had to say sorry o the owner that he had to went home for it, which onfused the owner why he didn't try the shoes with er own feet. The man smiled to the owner, "I would ather believe in the measure than my own feet."
Unit 1单词练习
一、 单词拼写
1. When learning English， it is quite important to develop the ability of____________ （交际）。
2. Failing in the examination again ___________ （心烦意乱） her a lot.
3. Those who are in difficult s___________ usually work harder to get out of it.
4. As an e__________ of the newspaper， I should be responsible for what is printed in it.
5. He was punished by the school because of his c____________ in the exam.
6. Many t__________ are so crazy about football that they get up to watch football games at midnight.
7. My English is very friendly to us. She often gives us some a_________ on learning English.
8. It‘s quite n_________ for a person to refuse the offer of help from strangers.
9. What is the r_________ for your absence of yesterday’s meeting？
10. Dancing with the rich in the party， he had a f_________ of being laughed at.
二、 选词填空。
??? face to face??? list??? concern about?? go through?? share??? reason?? suffer?? point??? habit?? add up
1. Every time he __________ the figures， he gets a different answer.
2. They are ___________ with a new problem which they must solve at once.
3. I am not in the ___________ of going to see a film in the day.
4. She ____________ all the things she had to buy.
5. What are the _____________ to look for when you are buying a new computer.
6. She just suddenly left without giving any_____________.
7. We _____________ the cost of the meal.
8. Mr. Zhang ____________ heavy loses in the accident.
9. She has _____________ an unhappy time recently.
10. She thinks only of herself， she never ______________ other people.
三、 短语翻译
1. 努力去做某事________________________
2. 根据_____________________
3. 对……很狂热______________________
4. 度假_________________
5. 关心__________________
6. 镇定下来______________________
7. 与……相处得好不好________________________
8. 有……的麻烦______________________
9. 经历，经受___________________________
10. 故意________________________
参考答案：
Unit 1:一、 1. communication??? 2. upset?? 3. situation?? 4. editor?? 5. cheating?? 6. teenagers????????? 7. advice??? 8. natural?? 9. reason?? 10. feeling二、 1. adds up?? 2. face to face?? 3. habit?? 4. listed?? 5. points?? 6. reason??? 7. shared?????????? 8. suffer?? 9. gone through?? 10. concerns herself about with三、1． Make an effort to do sth.?? 2. according to??? 3. be crazy about?? 4. on holiday??????? 5. be concerned about???? 6. calm down??? 7.? get on along well badly with….??????? 8. have trouble with??? 9. go through?? 10. on purpose?
高一（上）第1次月考英语试题
（满分100分,考试时间90分钟）
第一卷
一、单项填空 (共20小题，每小题1分, 满分20分。)
1. John said he would pay ______ second visit to China ______ next year.
A. the; / B. the; the C. a; the D. a; /
2. – Do you like watching soccer game?
– ______? I don’t quite follow you.
A. Why not B. What’s wrong C. What’s up D. Pardon．
3. I ______ go there alone, but he ______ go there by himself.
A. dare ; doesn’t dare B. dare to; dares not
C. dare; dare not D. dare to; doesn’t dare
4. Although I often send e-mails to Tom, I have never seen him ______.
A. eye to eye B. face to face C. face-to-face D. on my own
5.Father went to his doctor for_______ about his heart trouble.
A.an advice B.advice C.advices D.the advices
6．This is the first time I ______ such beautiful music .
A.heard B.am hearing C.will hear D.have heard
7.There weren’t enough computers for every student, so we______.
A. had got to save B. had to separate C. had to share D. had got to divide
8. While ______ the dog, you should take care not to______. Otherwise, it may be dangerous to strangers.
A. walking; get loose B. walks; be loose
C. walking for; get it loose D. training; get it run
9. – Do you think the Lakers will beat the Bulls?
– Yes. They have better players, so I ______ them to win.
A. hope B. prefer C. expect D. want
10. The reason ______ he was late was _____ that his car had broken down on the way.
A.why; because B.that; because C. that; for D.why; that
11. Thousands of works of art, ______ the most famous paintings, were ______ during the war.
A. included; missed B. including; missing
C. included; missing D. including; missed
12. When he came into the dinning hall, nobody said hello to him. So he felt ______.
Which of the following is wrong?
A. upset B. ignored C. calm D. unhappy
13. However, even on TV and the radio you will hear differences in the way ______ people speak.
A. that B. which C. / D. all of above
14. Keep ______. The photographer（相机） is ready.
A. still B. calm C. quiet D. silent
15. Three ______ seven makes ten.
A. adding to B. adds to C. added to D added up
16. The teacher ______ us ______ so much noise.
A. say to; don’t make B. told; not make
C. asked; not making D. asked; not to make
17. Tom had to call a taxi because the box was _____ to carry all the way home.
A.much too heavy B.too much heavy C.heavy too much D.too heavy much
18. Having retired(退休), he ______ the club for old men and plays chess every day there.
A. takes part in B. joins in C. attends D. joins
19. We still went on working ______ cold it was.
A. although B. even if C. however D. whatever
20. When I saw a lot of people gathering over there, I went over to see ______.
A. what was the matter B. what the matter was
C. what was happened D. what was the wrong
二、完形填空(共20小题，每小题1分, 满分20分。)
When I was 16 years old, I made my first visit to the United States. It wasn’t the first time I had been__21__. Like most English children I learned French __22_ school and I had often been to France, so I_23_ speaking a foreign language to people who didn’t understand_24. But when I went to America I was really looking forward to_25__ a nice easy holiday without any __26__ problems.
_27 wrong I was! The misunderstanding began at the airport. I was looking for a__28 telephone to give my American friend Danny a _29_ and tell her that I had arrived. A friendly old man saw me looking lost and asked__30__ he could help me. “ Yes,” I said, “ I want to give my friend a ring.” “ Well, that’s__31__,” he exclaimed. “ Are you getting32_? But aren’t you a bit _33__?” “ Who is talking about marriage?” I replied. “ I __34_want to give my friend a ring to tell her I’ve arrived. Can you tell me _35__there’s a phone box, please?” “ Oh!” he said, “there’s a phone downstairs.”
When at last we _36__meet up, Danny explained the misunderstandings to me. “Don’t worry,” she said to me. “I had so many_37__at first. There are lots of words which the Americans __38__differently in meaning from us British. You’ll soon get used to _39__funny things they say. Most of the__40__British and American people understand each other!”
21. A .out B. away C. outside D. abroad
22. A . from B. during C. at D. after
23. A. get used to B. was used to C. used to D. used
24. A. English B. French C. Russian D. Latin
25. A. buying B. having C. giving D. receiving
26. A. time B. human C. language D. money
27. A. Too B. What a C. What D. How
28. A. cheap B. popular C. public D. good
29. A. letter B. ring C. news D. information
30. A. that B. if C. where D. when
31. A. well B. over C. nice D. ring
32. A. to marry B. to be married C. marrying D. married
33. A. small B. little C. old D. young
34. A. very B. just C. just now D. so
35. A. where B. which C. over where D. that
36. A. did B. do C. can D. had
37. A. trouble B. difficulties C. things D. fun
38. A. write B. speak C. use D. read
39. A. every B. each C. any D. all the
40. A. chance B. situation C. condition D. time
三、阅读理解(共20小题，每小题1分, 满分20分。)
A
The hand, the eyes, and the brain work together to make human beings different from other animals. No other animals have all three parts to work together. No animals can do what human beings can do. Humans can do many things and feel many things with the hand. The hand can hold onto things and make things because the thumb works with the fingers. This fifth finger is strong. Most animals don’t have thumbs. The thumb can press against the other fingers. Without a thumb to press against the fingers, it is difficult to hold onto anything. The thumb and fingers can also fit the flat surface of a box and the curved (不平的) surface of a pencil. We can feel that something is hot or cold, soft or hard, smooth or rough. The hand, with thumb and fingers, is one of the best tools we have. Most animals see a flat picture. Their eyes can only see how high and how wide something is. Some animals see a different picture with each eye. Some don’t see in colour. Humans see one picture with both eyes working together. We can see how high and how wide something is. We can also see how far in front of or in back of something a thing is. The brain tells other parts of the body how to work. Some of the things the body does are automatic; that is, we don’t have to think about them. For example, we don’t have to think to make our heart eat or our stomach work. The brain tells the eyes and hands how to make useful and beautiful things. That is how human beings become tool makers and artists. That is how human can have richer and better lives than other animals.
41. Human beings are different from other animals because ___________.
A. human beings have the hands, the eyes, and the brain working all the time
B. other animals also have hands, the eyes, and the brain
C. human beings work together with other animals
D. the hands, the eyes, and the brain of the human can work together
42. According to the passage, when you say you hold onto something, you mean
___________.
A. you have it in your hand and keep it there by putting your fingers firmly round
it
B. you have it in your arms and keep it there by putting your fingers firmly round
it
C. you feel it with your hands
D. you press the fingers of your right hand against those of your left hand
43. The author tells us that no animals can do what humans can do. He gives quite a few facts to support the idea. One of them is that ___________.
A. most animals don’t see in colour
B. the humans see a thing with both eyes working together
C. only humans can see and how high and how wide a thing is
D. some animals can see only one picture
44. ___________ is automatic.
A. Breathing B. Driving a car C. Making a chair D. Playing football
45. People who make beautiful things are usually called ___________.
A. toolmakers B. artists C. scientists D. drivers
B
Not many years ago, a wealthy and rather strange old man named Johnson lived alone in a village in the south of England. He had made a lot of money in trading with foreign countries. When he was seventy-five, he gave￡12,000 to the village school to buy land and equipment for a children’s playground.
As a result of his kindness, many people came to visit him. Among them was a newspaperman. During their talk, Johnson remarked that he was seventy-five and expected to live to be a hundred. The newspaperman asked him how he managed to be healthy at seventy-five. Johnson had a sense of humor. He liked whisky (威士忌酒) and drank some each day. “I have an injection (注射) in my neck each evening,” he told the newspaperman, thinking of his evening glass of whisky.
The newspaperman did not understand what Johnson meant. In his newspaper he reported that Johnson was seventy-five and had a daily injection in his neck. Within a week Johnson received thousands of letters from all over Britain, asking him for the secret of his daily injection.
46. Johnson became a rich man through ___________.
A. doing business B. making whisky C. cheating D. buying and selling land
47. The gift of money to the school suggests (暗示) that Johnson ___________.
A. had no children B. was a strange man
C. was very fond of children D. wanted people to know how rich he was
48. Many people wrote to Johnson to find out ___________.
A. what kind of whisky he had B. how to live longer
C. how to become wealthy D. in which part of the neck to have an injection
49. The newspaperman ___________.
A. should have reported what Johnson had told him
B. shouldn’t have asked Johnson what injection he had
C. was eager to live a long life
D. should have found out what Johnson really meant
50. When Johnson said he had an injection in his neck each evening, he really meant that ___________.
A. he liked drinking a glass of whisky in the evening
B. he needn’t an injection in the neck
C. a daily injection in the evening would make him sleep well
D. there was something wrong with his neck
C
The best way of learning a language is using it. The best way of learning English is talking in English as much as possible. Sometimes you'll get your words mixed up (混合) and people will not understand you. Sometimes people will say things too quickly and you can't understand them. But if you keep your sense of humor , you can always have a good laugh at the mistakes you make. Don't be unhappy if people seem to be laughing at your mistakes. It's better for people to laugh at your mistakes than to be angry with you, because they don't understand what you are saying. The most important thing for learning English is: "Don't be afraid of making mistakes because everyone makes mistakes."
51. The writer thinks that the most important thing for you to learn a language is___________.
A. reading B. practising C. talking about it D. listening
52. What should you do in learning English?
A. Try to make some mistakes. B. Avoid making any mistakes.
C. Remember as many new words as you can. D. Use it as often as you cam
53. If people laugh at the mistakes you make, you should ___________.
A. be angry with them B. be angry with yourself
C. not care D. believe you are right
54. When you make a mistake, you should___________.
A. never make any mistakes again B. tell others not to make the same mistake
C. punish yourself for making it D. keep your sense of humor
55. The story tell us:" ___________."
A. It is normal (正常的) that we make some mistakes in learning English
B. Everyone must make mistakes
C. We can avoid making mistakes in learning a language
D. Laughing can help one learn English well
D
If you have a watch, don’t go to a watchmaker’s unless something is wrong with the machinery. Once I had a beautiful watch. And it had kept perfect time. But one night it happened that I forgot to wind it up (上发条). Next morning I went to a watchmaker as I wanted my perfect watch to be set by the exact time. He examined it and said, “The regulator (快慢调整器) must be pushed up as your watch is four minutes slow.
I tried to stop him from doing so, but he didn’t listen and pushed the regulator.
My beautiful watch began to gain. It gained faster and faster day by day. By the end of the second month it had left all the clocks and watches of the town far behind.
I could do nothing but take it to another watchmaker to be regulated. I expected him to regulate the watch at once, but he asked me to come in a week’s time. When at last I got my watch back from him, it began to slow down. And I failed to be in time for trains, business affairs, and even missed my dinners.
Now I went to a third watchmaker. When I was waiting for him to repair my poor watch, he took it to pieces and said that he would try to finish this work in three or four days. What I could do was to nod my head. After that, my watch went for half a day, and then stopped. So I kept taking my watch from one watchmaker to another. But each watchmaker disappointed me.
My watch had cost me two hundred dollars, but I paid for repairs more than two hundred. At last I decided to buy another watch, which I did.
56. The writer was sure that ___________.
A. you’d better not have your watch repaired if nothing has gone wrong with it
B. you’d better never have your watch repaired
C. you’d better not have your watch regulated
D. you’d better repair your watch yourself
57. The writer took his watch to the first watchmaker in order to ___________.
A. check (检查) it whether it kept good time B. change some parts
C. have it set by the exact time D. push up the regulator
58. The watch went faster than it used to be ___________.
A. after it was repaired B. before it was repaired
C. during the time when it was being repaired D. if it was repaired
59. Not long after his watch was regulated, he ___________ for the second time.
A. regulated it B. set it C. repaired it D. had it repaired
60. The writer decided to buy another watch because ___________.
A. he would not spend more money on repairs
B. he didn’t like the old one
C. a new watch could keep good time
D. he had spent two hundred dollars on repairs
四、英汉互译。(共10小题，每小题1分, 满分10分。)
61.不得不_____________ 62.遭受______________ 63.与……相处；进展______________
64.走近；上来；提出_______________ 65.故意______________ 66.because of______________ 67.calm down______________ 68. set down ______________
69.fall in love ______________ 70.get tired of______________
五、改写或完成句子(共20空，每空1分, 满分20分。) 为
71. A. He asked me, "Will you go to the park this evening?"
B: He asked me_____ I ________ go to the park ________ evening.
72. A: “What are you doing in my office?” the women teacher asked the boy.
B: The women teacher asked the boy ________ ________ ________ doing in________ office.
73. “ Don’t forget to post the letter for me on your way to school,” said my sister.→He ______ me ______ _______ forget to post the letter for ______ on my way to school.
74.你必充分利用好你的业余时间。
You must ______ _______ ________ of your spare time .
75. 在办公室内请不要吸烟。
You are ________ not to smoke in the office.
76.信不信由你，中国队战胜了日本队。
_______ _______ _______ ________,Chinese football team has beaten Japanese team.
77.他把希望寄托在我们昨天得到的好消息上。
He ________ his hopes on the good news we had yesterday．
六、书面表达(满分10分)
请根据下面提示，用英文简要描写你的一位好朋友周亮。
年龄16岁，身材不高，但很聪明；
兴趣广泛，爱好足球、音乐、上网等；
学习勤奋, 待人谦虚( modest )，乐于助人，耐心帮你学英语；
大家都很喜欢他，你也喜欢他。
注意：1. 词数: 100 词左右;
2. 题目: My Best Friend
第二卷(答题卷)
（满分100分，考试时间90分钟）
班级_____ 姓名 _____ 座号 _____ 成绩____________
一、单项填空 (共20小题，每小题1分, 满分20分。)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
二、完形填空(共20小题，每小题1分, 满分20分。)
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
三、阅读理解(共20小题，每小题1分, 满分20分。)
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
四、英汉互译。(共10小题，每小题1分, 满分10分。)
61.___________ 62. ____________ 63. ___________ 64. ___________ 65. _____________ 66.___________ 67. ___________ 68.______________69. ___________ 70. ___________
五、改写或完成句子(共20空，每空1分, 满分20分。) 为
71. ___________ ___________ ___________
72. ___________ ___________ ___________ ___________
73. ___________ ___________ ___________ ___________
74. ___________ ___________ ___________
75. ___________
76. ___________ ___________ ___________ ___________
77. ___________
六、书面表达(满分10分)
请根据下面提示，用英文简要描写你的一位好朋友周亮。
1.年龄16岁，身材不高，但很聪明；
2.兴趣广泛，爱好足球、音乐、上网等；
3.学习勤奋, 待人谦虚( modest )，乐于助人，耐心帮你学英语；
4.大家都很喜欢他，你也喜欢他。
注意：1. 词数: 100 词左右;
2. 题目: My Best Friend
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
高一（上）第1次月考英语试题参考答案
一、单项填空 (共20小题，每小题1分, 满分20分。)
1-5 CDDBB 6-10 DCACD 11-15 BCDAB 16-20 DADCA
二、完形填空(共20小题，每小题1分, 满分20分。)
21-25 DCBAB 26-30 CDCBB 31-35 CDDBA 36-40 ACCDD
三、阅读理解(共20小题，每小题1分, 满分20分。)
41-45 DABAB 46-50 ACBDA 51-55 BDCDA 56-60 ACADA
四、英汉互译。。(共10小题，每小题1分, 满分10分。)
61.have got to 62.suffer from 63.get along/on with 64.come up
65.on purpose 66.因为；由于 67.冷静下来 68.记下；放下；登记
69.相爱；爱上某人 70.对```厌倦
五、改写或完成句子(共20空，每空1分, 满分20分。)
71.if ; would ; that 72. what he was; her
73. told; not to ; her 74.make full use
75. requested 76. Believe it or not 77. based
六、书面表达(满分10分)
My Best Friend
Zhou Liang is my best friend. He’s sixteen. He is not very tall, but he is very smart.
He has many different interests. He is fond of music. He loves sports very much. He is a member of our school football team. Zhou Liang also likes to surf the Internet. He works hard at his lessons so he does well in all the subjects. He is modest and ready to help others. He has helped me with my English. With his help, I have made much progress and caught up with my classmates.
Everyone in my class likes Zhou Liang, so do I.
课件32张PPT。Language data bankn.测量；检查；鉴定；调查
We had better make a survey of the market.
我们最好做个市场调查。
They were please with their wild survey of his work.
他们广泛审查了他的工作，很满意。
a public opinion survey民意调查
Surveyor 调查员，土地探测员 1 . surveyv. 加，做加法；增添
If you add five and (to) five, you get ten.
Please add more sugar to my coffee.
请在我的咖啡中再加点糖。
2. addHis schooling added up to no more than two years.
他受的学校教育加起来还不到两年。
近义词 ：increase put together
反义词： subtract 减去，减
add up 加起来
add up to合计达
add fuel to flames火上加油
add to增加 adj. worried, anxious,
feeling unhappy about sth:
He felt upset about losing the money.
丢了钱，他感到难过
James was upset because he had lost his ticket.
詹姆很烦躁，因为他把车票丢了。
upset= rather unhappy3. upsetv. 使烦乱，扰乱，使不安，使不适
upset one’s play
打乱某人的计划
cause to worry , trouble:
upset one’s stomach
使胃不舒服
The thunder upset her.ignore vt.
to make no notice to someone or something 不理睬，忽视
She will ignore the bell and go somewhere quiet to calm him down.
The best way to deal with an impolite person is to ignore hi4. ignoren. ignorance
无知，愚昧，不学无术
His ignorance is surprising.
I was in complete ignorance of his intentions.
adj. ignorant
无知识的, 不知道的, 愚昧的, 幼稚的
be ignorant of
对……无知,不知道ignore something 和 be ignorant of sth.
If you ignore sth. , you know about it but pay no attention.
eg.
He knew there was a speed limit, but he ignore it and drove very fast.
他知道有车速限制，但却置之不理，把车开得飞快If you are ignorant of sth, you don’t know about it.
eg.
Most passengers were totally ignorant of the safety procedures.
大多数旅客根本不知道安全措施calm adj.
1. quiet and not worried or excited
The police chief advised his men to stay calm and not to lose their tempers.
He tried to keep calm about it.
2. not windy
It became calm after the storm. a calm day 5. calmcalm down :
to become or make someone less angry, excited , or worried
（使）某人安静下来
Eg:
She was very sad, would you please calm her down?calm：　
quiet：　
silent：　
still：　没有干扰的安静；无动静
镇定的
静止不动
寂静；沉默不语
选用quiet; calm; silent; still填空
1) Let’s go and _____ your angry brother down.
2) They moved to the countryside and lived a ______ life.
3) I prefer ______ reading to reading aloud.
4) You should keep _____ while I take a photo of you.calmquietsilentstillhave got to (had got to ) 必须，不得不
1)1 have got to是 have to 的口语形式
Eg. You haven’t got to change at London Station.
2)have got to 的
否定形式只有一种: haven’t got to
疑问式也只有一种: Have you got to…? 并且不可同助动词或情态动词连用。6. have got to3) have got to 的含义与must相似.
have got to 着重于表示客观上的需要,
含有被迫的意味, must 强调主观的需要
eg. We have got to work hard.
4) have got to 没有被动语态
have got to 不同于have got,
have got 意为“有”
eg. I have got a pen.v.& n.1 使担心, 使不安（通常用被动语态）
be concerned about 为……担心
She is concerned about her son’s future.
2 涉及; 关系到; 参与(一般不能用进行时, 但可用于被动语态) concern oneself with/in sth.
He is concerned in the new project.
She concerns herself with/in social welfare.7. concernadj.
1 松开的, 自由的, 无束缚的
get/be loose 未拴住的, 松开的
I have one hand loose but the other is tied.
This dog must not be left loose.
2 松的，松动的，不紧的，宽松的;
a loose button 快掉的扣子
the loose soil 疏松的土壤
a loose sweater宽松的套衫8. loose9.?go through 经历The poor girl has gone through a lot since her parents died.go through the test in class struggle经历阶级斗争的考验10.?hide(hid, hidden) awayThey were afraid and hid away11. set down=write down/take downI set down everything that happened then.You should set down the key language
points in your notebook.12. series (单复同形)
a series of + n (pl) There is a television series on this channel every night.a series of good harvests/ questionsThere has been a series of car accidents at the crossing. 13.?stay (link v) + adj/ n1) I stayed awake through the stormy night.2) He stayed single all his life.3) The weather stayed sultry.天气持续闷热。4) Stay seated!坐在那别动!14.?do sth on purposeI think she lost the key on purpose.do sth with/ for the purpose of…He took along one of his pictures with the purpose of finding a job. = He went to town in order that he could sell the painting. 15. in order to = so as toHe went to town in order to sell the painting.16. much too + adj / adv
too much (+ un) = more than enough
The dress is _______ long for me.
There is very little room in the house because it has far________ furniture.
It’s _________hot.
I have _________ homework to do, so I
have no time to go theremuch toomuch tootoo muchtoo much17.?happen vi.1) What time did the accident happen?2) No one know who had fired the gun— it all happened so quickly.sb. happen to do sth. (似乎)碰巧= to be or as if by chanceI happened to see her on my way to work.If you happen to find it, please let me know.18.?hold/ have sb in one’s power
控制住/ 摆布某人 19. It’s the first/ second time that 某人第一 /二次做The thundering clouds held me entirely in their power.It was the first time in a year and a half that I’d seen the night face to face.翻译下列短语：
1． 把…加起来
___________________________
2． 总计共达
___________________________
3． 把……加到……里
___________________________
4. 应该 / 有责任做某事
___________________________add upadd up toadd sth. to sth.have got to (do sth.)5. 经历 / 经受……；穿过；浏览
_____________________
6. 躲 / 藏起来
_________________________________
7. 一连串 / 一系列的
_____________________________
8. 写下 / 记下
_________________________________go through hide away a series of set down9. 受痛苦 / 受损失 / 受折磨
_________________________
10. 和某人（很好地）相处
___________________________
11. 爱上某人 / 某物
_________________________________
12. 对……着迷
________________________________suffer from get along (well) withfall in love withbe crazy about / on13. 渴望某物 / 迷恋某人
_____________________________
14. 按照，根据……
__________________________________
15. 参加（游戏 / 活动）等
____________________________
16. 如此……以至于……
______________________________be crazy foraccording to join inso … that… 17. 面对面
__________________________________
18. 有目的地/ 特意（做某事）
_________________________
19． 平静 / 镇静下来
_________________________________
20． 关心 / 挂念 （某人 / 某事）
__________________________be concerned aboutface to faceon purposecalm down课件44张PPT。Learning about language1. Answer keys for Ex1 on Page4:outdoors
upset
be concerned about
loose
go throughignore
face to face
calm down
curtain
seriesDiscovering useful words and expressions2. Answer keys for Ex. 2 on page 4: Anne’s sister, Margot, was very ______ that the family had to move. However, she knew that she had got to __________all the difficulties with her family. She found it difficult to settle and ___________ in the hiding place, because she was ______________ whether they would be discovered. upset go throughcalm downconcerned about She suffered from loneliness, but she had to learn to like it there. What she really missed was going _______ walking the dog for her neighbour. It was such fun to watch it run ___ __in the park. She wished she could tell her neighbour__________ that she was sorry not to be able to do it any longer, but she knew that was too dangerous !outdoorslooselyface to face 3. Answer keys for Ex.3 on page 4:When the man saw the car accident on the highway, he stopped to offer help.
“How can Linda recover from her illness in this room when it’s so dirty and dusty ? It will only make her worse.” said the doctor.After Peter died, George set down the story of their friendship in a book.
When the street lights go on at dusk , they make a beautiful picture, so different from the daytime. 5. Good friends do not concern about what they do for each other; instead they offer help when it is needed.
Although Tim and Mike come from entirely different backgrounds, they became close friends.Please draw the curtain ; the sunlight is too bright.
“Sorry, I didn’t break the plate on purpose .”
“ It’s OK. Don’t worry about it.” Grammar直接引语和间接引语Direct and Indirect SpeechGrammar: Direct and Indirect Speech (1)转述他人的陈述→陈述句→ She asked me what I was doing.1) He said , “I’m going to Beijing.”→ He said that he was going to Beijing.2) He asked, “Are you a teacher?”→ He asked me if /whether I was a doctor.3) She said , “What are you doing?”2. 转述他人的疑问→一般疑问句3. 转述他人的问题→特殊疑问句 直接引语变成间接引语，句子结构的变化 He said, “I have been to the Great Wall. ”
He said to us that he had been to the Great Wall.
He said, “I'll give you an examination next Monday. ”
He told us that he would give us an examination the next Monday. 陈述句
用连词that引导，that在口语中常省略。主句的谓语动词可直接用引语中的said, 也可用told来代替，注意，可以说said that, said to sb. that, told sb. that，不可直接说told that 陈述句:“I don’t like computers,” Sarah said to her friends.Sarah said to her friendsthat saiddidn’tsheSarah said to her friends that she didn’t like computers.Sarah一般疑问句 He said, “Do you have any difficulty with pronunciation?”
He asked (me) whether/if I had any difficulty with my pronunciation.
He said, “You are interested in English, aren't you?”
He asked whether I was interested in English. 间接引语用连词whether或if引导，原主句中谓语动词said要改为asked(me/him/us等)，语序是陈述句的语序 一般疑问句:
Is it easy to improve the condition of the soil?
( They asked him )They asked himifIt is easy to improve the condition of the soil.it is easy to improve the condition of the soil.askediswasThey asked him if it was easy to improve the condition of the soil.特殊疑问句 He said to me，“What's your name?”
He asked me what my name was.
He asked us, “How many car factories have been built in your country?”
He asked us how many car factories had been built in our country. 原来的疑问词作为间接引语的连词，主句的谓语动词用ask(sb. )来表达，语序改为陈述句语序 特殊疑问句：
When do you harvest the wheat ?
( They asked him )They asked himWhenyou harvest the wheatyou harvest the wheat.heharvestedThey asked him when he harvested the wheat.选择疑问句 He asked, “Do you speak English or French?”
He asked me whether I spoke English or French.
I asked, “Will you take bus or take train?”
I asked him whether he would take bus or take train. 用whether…or…表达，而不用if…or…，也不用either…or… 5. 注意地点的变化在直接引语变为间接引语时需要注意的变化1. 注意时态的变化2. 注意人称变化。3. 注意指示代词的变化4. 注意时间的变化6. 注意个别趋向动词的变化When you change a sentence from direct speech to indirect speech, you sometimes need to change the verb tense. You may also need to change pronouns , time in order to keep the same meaning.Direct indirect
Present past
Past past and past perfect
Present perfect past perfect
Past perfect past perfectThe geography teacher told us that the sun rises in the east and sets in the west.谓语动词时态变化需要注意几点：1.直接引语表述的是客观真理，变为间接引语时，时态不变The geography teacher said, “The sun rises in the east and sets in the west.”She says that she’ll never forget the days in the country.2. 如果直接引语所表述的内容在目前和说话时同样有效，变间接引语时，时态可不变The children said, “We love this game.”They told us that they love that game.3.主句谓语动词的时态是现在时态，在引述时，时态不变。She says, “I’ll never forget the days in the country.”1. 当主句的谓语动词是将来时的时候
2. 当直接引语部分带有具体的过去时间状语时
3. 当直接引语中有以when, while引导的从句，表示过去的时间时
4. 当引语是谚语、格言时
5. 当直接引语中有情态动词should, would, could, had better, would rather, might, must, ought to, used to, need时 从句时态无须改变的还有以下情况: 直接引语 间接引语
指示代词 时 间 状 语 地点状语 方向性动词 this, that, these those
now, then, today that day
this week that week yesterday the day before
last week the week before
four days ago four days before the day before yesterday two days before
tomorrow the next day
next month the next month
here there
come, go,bring take Exercises:1. He said , “I m afraid I can’t finish this work.”2.He said , “I haven’t heard from him since May.”

3.Tom said “I will see you next week.”
He said that he was afraid he couldn’t finish that work.He said that he hadn’t heard from him since May.Tom said that he would see me the next week.4. “Why were you late again?” The teacher said to me.

5. “I don’t like swimming,” said Sarah.

6. His friends asked him if he would go to Dalian.
7. “Have you been to Paris?” My classmate asked me.The teacher asked me why I was late again.Sarah said she didn’t like swimming.His friends asked him, “Will you go to Dalian?”My classmate asked me if I had been to Paris.Anne said that she didn’t know the address of her new home.
Anne told her father that she had got tired of looking at nature through dirty curtains and dusty windows.
The girl said that she needed to pack up her things in the suitcase very quickly.
Her father asked her why she chose her diary and old letters.Answer keys to exercise 2 on page 5“Are you very hot with so many clothes on ?” Mother asked.
“What else have you hidden under your overcoat?” Margot asked her.
“When shall we go back home ?” Ann asked her father.
“Why did you talk so much to that boy ?” Father asked Anne.1. Jack said to me, “You look worried today.”
Jack told me that ___ worried ___. A. he looks…today B. you look…today C. we looked…that day D. I looked…that day2. We said to her, “They’re walking through the street now.”
We told her that ___ through the street ___. A. we were walking…then B. you are walking…now C .they were walking…then D. they walking…now 3. Mr Black said, “I have walked a long way this week.”
Mr Black said that __ a long way __. A. I had walked…last week B. he had walked…that week C. I walked…last week D. he has walked…this week4. The man thought, “I shall take it back tomorrow.”
The man thought that __ take it back ____. A. I shall…tomorrow B. I shall…the next day C. he should…tomorrow D. he would …the next day 5. They said to us, “Are you afraid to leave this house ?”
They asked us ____ afraid to leave _____ house. A. that were we…this B. that we were…that C. if were we …this D. if we were…that6. Jane said, “What did he hear about a week ago?”
Jane asked ____ about _____. A. that he heard…a week ago B. what he had heard…the week before C. what he had herd… a week ago D. if he heard…the week ago7. She asked, “Whose house will he break into next time ?”
She asked whose house ____ break into _____. A. will he…next time B. would he…the next time C. he would…the next time D. he will…next time 8. Jack said to her, “Where do you spend your holidays?” Jack asked her where ____ holidays. A. she spent her B. you spend your C. she spend her D. you spent your9. Black asked me, “ Why haven’t you left here yet?”
Black asked me why ____ yet. A. I hadn’t left there B. I haven’t left here C. hadn’t I left there D. haven’t I left here 10. The teacher asked her, “Does the sun rise in the east ?”
The teacher asked her ___ the sun ___ in the east. A. if…rise B. if…rises C. whether…rose D. whether did …riseReaders can ________ quite well without knowing the exact meaning of each word.
A. get over B. get in
C. get along D. get through高考链接C解析：答案C。本题主要考查具体语境中get短语的用法。全句意为：尽管读者不知道每个单词的确切含义，但他们能够很好得读懂，即读书进展得顺利，故用get along。2. It’s hard for me to imagine what I would be doing today if I ______ in love, at the age of seven, with the Melinda Cox Library in my hometown.
A. wouldn’t have fallen B. had not fallen
C. should fall D. were to fall高考链接B解析：答案B。本题考查了fall in love在虚拟语气中的应用，从标志性时间状语at the age of seven看，宾语从句内容意指过去。在虚拟语气结构中，若指过去，从句中动词形式用过去完成时，主句中谓语动词形式用would/should/might/ could/have done。3. Father went to his doctor for _______ about his heart trouble.
A. an advice B. advice
C. advices D. the advices高考链接B解析：答案B。Advice若作“忠告，劝告，建议”讲，无论什么情况下都不可数，故A、C、D各项均属错误。Advice前不能用不定冠词，但可被some，much，a lot of/lots of，a piece of，a bit of，a word of等修饰。4. I wonder how he ____ that to the teacher.
A. dare to say B. dare saying
C. not dare say D. dared say高考链接D解析：答案D。本题主要考查了dare作为情态动词和实义动词的基本用法。作为实义动词，dare有人称、数和时态的变化，故dare to say与主语he相悖；dare doing结构本身错误；dare的否定形式应为dare not do(情态动词)或don’t/doesn’t/didn’t dare (实义动词) to do。 Homework Review the knowledge of direct speech and indirect speech and summarize the rules.Take a break!课件35张PPT。ReadingAnne’s Best FriendReadingBackgroundThis is a true story. It took place in Amsterdam, Holland in the early 1940s after the German Nazis had occupied most of Europe. The Nazi Party ruled Germany from 1933 to 1945. One of their key policies was to kill all the Jews in Europe. If any persons known to be Jews were found, they would be sent to concentration camps farther east, mostly in Poland. Families were separated and transported in trains. For many days, they went without food, water, sanitation or fresh air. To avoid this terrible fate, some Jewish families went into hiding, often with the help of non-Jewish friends . This diary was written during the time when Anne and her family moved to escape from being killed by Nazis.Hitler at the Beginning of World War II A Nazi symbol奥斯维辛集中营World War IIthe German Nazis
JewsBackground knowledge What do you know about the World War II?
What is the relationship between Nazis & Anne (Jewish)?
What has the German Nazis done to the Jewish?The Second World War and the Nazi crime纳粹正在建设集中营纳粹逼迫犹太人离开他们的家园被关在集中营中的犹太人纳粹屠杀犹太人的真实场景纳粹正对着屠杀后幸存的妇女进行扫射犹太人排队进入后面的毒气室被毒死的犹太人的衣服和鞋子Why do you need friends ? Make a list of reasons why friends are important to you .2. Skim the first paragraph of the reading passage below and find who was Anne’s best friend . Pre-readingWho was Anne?
What had happened to her? What’s the main idea of this passage?Skimming:Anne’s father : Otto FrankAnne’s mother:
Mrs. FrankAnne FrankAnne’s older sister:
MargotPeter, who lived with the Franks in the atticBackground Informationattichiding placeThey moved to Amsterdam, Netherlands Born on June 12, 1929, Anne Frank was a German-Jewish teenager who was forced to go into hiding during the HolocaustAnneAnne’s diaryAnneAnne’s diaryKittyBest friendAnne Frank
1929 Born in Germany
Moved to Amsterdam1933From 1940
Hidden in a building for two years, writing diary1944
Discovered and was killed the next yearHer diary was published after the warReading method whenwherewhowhatwhyhowRead fast and fill in the form below.World War IINetherlandsAnneHer diaryAbout two yearsThursday 15, June, 1944Join the correct part of the sentences1 Anne kept a diary because
2 She felt very lonely because
3 They had to hide because
4 Anne named her diary Kitty becauseA she couldn't meet her friends.
B Jews were caught by Nazis and put away.
C she could tell everything to it.
D she wanted it to be her best friendCABDBefore she and her family hid away , she took nature for granted , but now she appreciates its beauty and majesty .How did Anne feel about nature before she and her family hid away ?Read again and answer the following questions on page 3:Her feelings have changed because she was no longer able to go out as she pleased because she is in hiding . Losing freedom has made her feel more excited about good and beautiful things around her .Why do you think her feelings changed towards nature ?She did not want to be a “prisoner” in the hiding place any longer . He wanted to live a normal life again . Why did Anne no longer just like looking at nature out of the window ?1. What is an ordinary diary like according to Anne? What about her diary?
2. Why was she so crazy about things to do with nature?
3. Why did she stay awake on purpose until very late one evening?
4. Why didn’t she dare open the window when the moon was too bright?
5. Guess the meanings of “spellbound”, What is the meaning of “spellbound”? Use another word to substitute it.More questions : 1. What is an ordinary diary like according to Anne? What about her diary?According to Anne, an ordinary diary is where most people like to set down a series of facts. But Anne wrote down her deepest feelings and thoughts in her diary. She told everything to her best friend --- her diary.2. Why was she so crazy about things to do with nature?Because she had been indoors too long, she was so eager to see the outdoor world --- the blue sky, the singing birds,
the beautiful flowers ,
the bright moon,
everything.3. Why did she stay awake on purpose until very late one evening? Because she wanted to have a good look at the bright moon.4. Why didn’t she dare open the window when the moon was too bright?Because she was afraid that she might be discovered by the German Nazis.5. Guess the meanings of “spellbound”, What is the meaning of “spellbound” ? Use another word to substitute it.Spellbound means to concentrate with delight for some time. Interested.What kind of feelings do the following words imply?free, relaxed, peacefulfreeanxious, eager, thirstyscared, frightened helpless, depressed, lonelyActivityHow will you spend the the whole year?
How will you treat each other and make friends ?What will you do to pass the time if you had to stay in a bedroom for a whole year? (You are not allowed to leave the bedroom, you must be quiet, no music, TV, or computer games. You are allowed one companion.)What do you think is the purpose of this passage?
Why did Anne write it?
Do you think it is successful? Do you understand Ann’s feelings?
What is Ann’s tone? In other words, is she angry, sad, happy or thrilled?
What is Ann’s point of view? Do you agree with it? If so, why? If not, why not?Think about the following questions:Homework:
1.Write a short story about Anne’s life of hiding away.
2.Tick out sentences that you think are difficult for you.3.Surf the Internet to find more information about Anne and to read more about Anne’s diary.Take a break!课件25张PPT。Using languageReading and listeningProblems in making friendsWhat problems do you have in making friends? Page 61. Have you ever been misunderstood by others?2. What will you do if you are misunderstood by others?QuestionsNow read Lisa’s letter and find out what her problem is.READING She makes friends with a boy. But other students gossip that they have fallen in love. She doesn’t want to end their friendship but she hates others gossiping. have trouble with…have trouble with sth.同……闹别扭,有……病
痛,有……困难
eg: He has trouble with his best friend / his stomach / his English study.
have trouble / difficulty ( in ) doing sth.
在干……方面有困难
eg: The old lady had trouble / difficulty ( in ) finding her home. get along with..与……相处
e.g: I am getting along well with my new classmates.
进展
e.g: How are you getting along with your English? advicen. a piece of advice
two pieces of advice
ask for sb’s advice 征求某人意见
follow / take sb’s advice 接受/听从某人意见
v. advise
advise sb. to do sth. 建议某人做某事
advise doing sth.
advise that …(后接宾语从句时用虚拟语气 should+动词原形,should 可以省略）
eg: The teacher advised that we ( should ) come to school earlier.like opposite sex very much
恋爱， 相爱
They fell in love at the first sight
他们一见钟情fall in loveLISTENING1.Listen to Miss Wang’s advice and answer:
Does Miss Wang advise Lisa should end her friendship with the boy or they should continue their friendship? 2.Listen to the tape fill in the missing words according to the listening text.
There is nothing wrong with you and this boy _______ friends and _____ together.
________ your friendship with this boy would be a ______ thing to do.
Teenagers like to ______, and they often see something that isn’t real.
My advice is to _____ your classmates. That way you will _____them that you are more ________ than they are. beingstudyingEndingstupidgossipignoreshowgrown-up1) What does Miss Wang say about their friendship?
She says that _____________________________.ANSWERS:There is nothing wrong in Lisa making friends with a boy and that it is possible for a boy and a girl to be just good friends. 3.Listen again and answer the questions in Part 3.2) Why does Miss Wang think it would be foolish if they end their friendship?
She thinks that ___________________________.
Lisa would lose a good friend who can help her with her studies.3) How does she explain why Lisa's classmates gossip about their friendship?
She says that _____________________________
4) What is Miss Wang's advice?
She asks Lisa to __________________________teenagers like to gossip and that perhaps they can’t understand Lisa’s friendship with the boy.ignore her gossiping classmates. Writing: Fill in the missing sentences Dear Lisa,
There is nothing wrong with you and this boy being friends and studying together. And no matter what other students say, it is possible for a boy and a girl to be just good friends.
1._______________________________________
Not only would you lose a good friend, but you would also lose someone who is helping you with your studies.Ending your friendship with this boy would be a stupid thing to do.Teenagers like to gossip, and they often see something that doesn’t exist. Perhaps they can’t understand your friendship with this boy.
2.______________________________________
You should feel sorry for those students who have never enjoyed such a friendship. My advice is to ignore your gossiping classmates. 3.________________________________________________________________________________
Yours,
Wang FeiBut that’s no reason to throw it away.That way you will show them that you are more grown up than they are.Speaking1.Do you agree with Miss Wang’s advice? Why or why not? Discuss it in small groups.
2.If you were Lisa, what would you do next after you heard Miss Wang’s advice?You may use the following expressions in your conversationAGREEING
I agree. Yes, I think so. So do I. Me too.
Exactly. No problem. Sure. Certainly.
Of course. All right. You’re right/correct.
Good idea. I think that’s a good idea.DISAGREEING
I don’t think so. Neither do I.
That’s not right. Yes, but …
I’m afraid not. No way. Of course not.
I’m sorry, but I don’t agree. I disagree.Reading and Writing Miss Wang has received a letter from Xiaodong. He is also asking for some advice. Read the letter on the right carefully and help Miss Wang answer it.Before you write, brainstorm with a partner about ways to change the situation. Make a list of your ideas and give your reasons.1Page 7Dear Miss Wang,
I’m a student from Huzhou Senior High school. I have a problem. I’m not very good at communicating with people. Although I try to talk to my classmates, I still find it hard to make good friends with them. So I feel quite lonely sometimes. I do want to change this situation. But I don’t know how. I would be grateful if you could give me some advice.
Yours
XiaodongI think…I believe…
I suggest…In my opinionSecondly…And then…Besides…
In addition…But…However…
On the other hand…In short…In a word…
Therefore…So…Decide which are the best ideas and put them into an order. Then write down your advice and explain how it will help. Each idea can make one paragraph. The following example and the expressions may help you.Swap your letter with your partner. Look at his/her work and help to improve it. Pick out any mistakes you see in spelling, verb forms, or punctuation. Swap back. Correct any mistakes and write it out.32I’m sorry you are having trouble in making friends. However, the situation is easy to change if you take my advice. Here are some tips to help you:
First, why not go and talk to people standing on their own? I agree that this is difficult but that person may be lonely too. If you do this I am sure you will soon have a new friend.Dear Xiaodong,Sample writing:Second, you can begin the conversation by asking about their likes and dislikes. That way you will soon find people with the same interests. I think that is a good way to find new friends.Thirdly, it would be a good idea if you try to join a discussion. You may not feel that this is right, but by doing this you are letting people know how friendly you are. So there should be no problem. It should certainly provide you with some new friends.
I hope you find these ideas usefulYours,
Miss Wang课件32张PPT。Unit 1
FriendshipWarming upWords and expressionsShould auld acquaintance be forgot, and never brought to mind? Should auld acquaintance be forgot, for the sake of auld lang syne. If you ever change your mind, but I living, living me behind, oh bring it to me, bring me your sweet loving, bring it home to me. --- Leo Sayer Auld lang syne (友谊地久天长)I'll give you jewelry and money too. That' s all all I'll do for you.
Oh~ bring it to me, bring me your sweet loving, bring it home to me. Yeah~ Yeah~
Darling you know I laughed when you left, but now I know that I only hurt myself. Please bring it to me, bring your sweet sweet love, bring it home, bring it home to me. If you ever change your mind, but I living, living me behind, oh bring it to me, bring me your sweet loving, bring it home to me. For auld lang syne my dear, for auld lang syne, we'll take a cup of kindness yet for the sake of auld lang syne….Junior middle school life has passed away, but the friends made there would never be forgotten…Should auld (old) acquaintance (friend) be forgot,
And never brought to mind?
Should auld acquaintance be forgot,
For the sake of auld lang syne (old long since)… ?As the saying goes:
friends are like wine; the older, the better.Warming up1. Do you have friends? What kind of friend do you like? Please say something about your best friend.friendskindhonestbravehelpfulGenerous
(慷慨的)humorouscleverhard-working hobbiesagepersonalityappearance?Sth. in commonone of
your friendsWhat do you want from a friend?
How does he or she act towards you?
What do you do for your friendsPlaying happily togetherGetting on quite well with each otherTaking good care of each other or getting ready to help each otherCooperating and improving togetherLearning from each other and competing with each otherSharing joys or sadness with each otherBeing true / faithful to each otherSo think about what is friendship?F
R
I
E
N
Dfaithful / friendly/ fair …reliable / respectful / responsibleinteresting…equal / encouragingnice… devoted…S
H
I
Psharing / sincere… helpful / honest… independent… polite / patient What kind of person are you going to make friends with in the new school?Are you a good friend?To have a good friend, first you need to be a good friend.1. You want to see a very interesting film with your friend, but your friend can’t go until he/she finishes cleaning the bicycle. You will …
A. go without your friend.
B. help your friend clean the bicycle so you can leave early.
C. plan to go another timeAre you good to your friend? Do the survey on p1.
Add up your score and see how many points you get.2. Your friend asks to borrow your favorite camera. When he/she borrowed it last time, he/she broke it and you had to pay to get it repaired. You will …
A. say no.
B. let your friend borrow it without saying anything.
C. let your friend borrow it, but tell him/her that if the camera is broken again, he will have to pay to get it repaired. 3. Your friend comes to school very upset. The bell rings so you need to go to class. You will …
A. ignore the bell and go somewhere quiet to calm your friend down.
B. tell your friend you’ve got to go to class.
C. Tell your friend you’re concerned about him/her but you have to go to class. You two meet after class and talk. 4. Your friend has gone on holiday and asked you to take care of his/her dog. While walking the dog, you were careless and it got loose and was hit by a car. The dog’s leg was broken. You will…
A. take the dog to the vet and pay the bill yourself.
B. ask your parents to take the dog to the vet and pay for it.
C. take the dog to the vet but give the bill to your friend to pay5. You are taking your mid-term exam. Your friend, who doesn’t work hard, asks you to help him cheat in the exam by looking at your paper. You will…
A. let him/her look at your paper.
B. tell him he/her should have studied hard , so don’t let him look at your paper.
C. tell him/her to look at someone else’s paper.Scoring sheet for the survey:Situation 1. A. 1 B. 3 C. 2
Situation 2. A. 1 B. 2 C. 3
Situation 3 A. 1 B. 2 C. 3
Situation 1 A. 3 B. 2 C. 1
Situation 1 A. 0 B. 6 C. 04-7 points: You are not a good friend. You either neglect your friend’s needs or just do what he wants you to do. The qualities of a person who cannot be a friend of others easily :selfish（自私的）, dishonest,
bad-tempered, mean（吝啬的）, impatient, narrow-minded, noisy, lazy, gossipy(爱说闲话的）…8-12 points: You are a good friend but you sometimes let your friendship become too important, or you fail to show enough concern for your friend’s needs and feelings. Try to strike a balance between your friend’s needs and your own responsibilities.13+ points: You are an excellent friend who recognizes that to be a good friend you need to balance your needs and your friend's needs．Well done! The qualities of a person who can be a friend of others easily : honest, friendly, helpful, kind, brave, open-minded, generous, patient, good-tempered(好脾气的）, trustworthy, careful, full of love, caring, responsible, interesting, easygoing（易相处的）, warm-hearted, selfless, intelligent, dedicatedDebateSample answers : Yes, I think so. / No, I don’t think so. …because we can … / In my opinion / I think, believe, feel that it’s …Do you think friendship is important in your life? Why do you think so? Does a friend always have to be a person? What else can be your friend?Prepare the new words before learning the reading.
Search and collect the sayings about friendshipHomeworkTake a break!朋友---周华健课件38张PPT。WorkbookListening Before you listen, discuss these questions with your partner. Then go over the exercise.
Do you think it is a good idea to make friends with people from other countries? Why?1I think it is/isn’t a good idea.
Because……Part 1Part 2to practise another language with a native speaker
to learn new ways of thinking and ideas
to find out more about another country
……2.What are the advantages of this friendship?Listen to the tape and Write down in one sentence what Leslie does in China. 2Leslie does some business in China and her company sells buses.Part 1Part 2Listen to Part 1 again and tick the things done by Leslie.going to watch peking opera
seeing the great wall
going to people’s homes
swimming in the sea
going out for delicious dinners
visiting a mountain
staying in a good hotel
going shopping3What does Leslie say about the friends she made in China? Listen to Part 2 again and write your answers in one or two sentences.4Leslie says that she made some friends but they are just business friends on a short visit. Leslie thinks some of the friends in China may have liked her, but others may try to be nice to her so as to gain a business advantage.TalkingIn pairs discuss these questions.Do you agree with Leslie? Give your reasons.
Do you think foreigners and Chinese people have the same idea about friendship?
What misunderstandings do you think might occur between Chinese people and foreigners?Using words and Expressions你把所有的数加起来就会知道结果. (add up)
我们努力想让他平静下来，但他还是激动地大叫. (calm down)
玛丽在医院里住了很长一段时间后，恢复了健康. (recover)
You will know the result when you add up all the numbers.We tried to calm him down but her kept shouting excitedly.After a long stay in hospital, Mary recovered.Answer keys to the exercise 1 on page 41李鸣在这里定居后，和邻居们相处得很好. (settle; get along with)
如果你不想和我在一起，你就收拾东西走人. (pack up)
战争期间，我受了很多苦. 我用日记记下自己的经历，以便老了以后能够记住. (suffer; set down)Since Li Ming settled here, he has got along well with his neighbours.If you don’t want to stay with me, you can pack up and go.During the war, I suffered a lot. I wrote my diary to set down my experiences so I would remember them when I was old.Answer keys to exercise 2 on page 42get tired of
got along with
got into
got back
get off
got back
got used to
get intoAnne said that when they arrived at Prinsengracht they went quickly upstairs and into the hiding place.
She said that when they closed the door behind them, they were alone.
She said Margot had come faster on her bicycle and was already waiting for them.
She said all the rooms were full of boxes and they lay on the floor and the beds. Answer keys to exercise 1 on page 42Using structuresShe said the little room was filled with bedclothes so they had to start clearing up at once, if they wished to sleep in comfortable beds that night.
Anne said her mother and Margot were not able to help because they were tired.
They lay down on their beds, but she and her father, the two “helpers” of the family, started at once.Anne said they unpacked the boxes, filled the cupboards and tidied the whole day, until they were extremely tired.
She said they did sleep in clean beds that night.
She said they did sleep in clean beds that night.
She said they hadn’t had any warm food to eat all day, but they didn’t care.
Anne said her mother and Margot were too tired and worried to eat, and she and her father were too busy.Listening taskAnne made a friend in the hiding place. He was the son of another family hiding with them. Listen to the story and tick the pair who are disagreeing about the friendship.Anne and her friend
Her friend and her father
Ann and her father12Listen to the story again to find out what happened.She should be careful because they lived so close togetherShe wanted her father to be happy for her to have a friendHe was unhappyShe wanted to continue.He thought Anne would agree to stop seeing Peter so oftenShe thought her father was wrong.Work in pairs and make a list of things she might say to her father to make him change his mind.3Everyone needs a friend. Anne needs a good friend.
They talk together happily and they are not doing anything wrong.
They are always with the family, so her father can watch over her.
It is normal for a girl like Anne to want to have a boyfriend.Discuss the following questions.Do you always do what your parents tell you?
If your parents misunderstand your friendship with a boy/girl, what would you do? And what would your parents do?
What’s the consequences of disobeying your parents?BrainstormingDo you know any place in the world where Chinese and Westerner cultures live side by side?Brainstorming-I----Talking (2m)Hong kongSingaporeVancouverMacaoCan you imagine what the life will be in such a place?Pre-reading-I (2m)It’s said that Hawaii is a
place where the East truly meets
the West. Let’s see in Hawaii
how people show their friendship.by giving a circle of
flowers worn around
the necklei(s)Read the passage and decide what each of the following words means in the language of the Hawaiians.to be with happiness / goodbye / our hearts singing togetheroneness with all peoplehelpfamilya circle of flowers worn around the neckReading-I----fast reading (2m)Read the text again and answer the following questions.What are the ways Hawaiians show their friendship?
Why do many different peoples call Hawaii their home?
How do people in Hawaii get on with one another?
Can you find similar things in your hometown? How do you show friendship to visitors?Reading-II----Detailed reading (5m)What are the ways Hawaiians show their friendship?Hawaiians say “aloha” to each other to show friendship. They welcome people with “lokahi” which means “oneness with all people”. They give visitors a “lei” to make them feel at home.Why do many different peoples call Hawaii their home?It’s because Hawaii is a place where many cultures are encouraged to live together peacefully and co-operate with each other.How do people in Hawaii get on with one another?They try to help each other so that all feel stronger. They solve the problems with understanding and treat all people as if they are part of the same family.Can you find similar things in your hometown? How do you show friendship to visitors?Read the following poem carefully and write down the pairs of words that rhyme and add more similar rhyming words.
A friend is someone we turn to
when our spirits need a lift,
A friends is someone we treasure
for our friendship is a gift.
A friend is someone who fills our lives
with beauty, joy and grace.
And makes the whole world we live in
a better and happier place.FriendsAppreciation (2m)Speaking taskDo you think Martin behaved fairly to his friend? Give your reasons.
How do you think Martin’s friend felt?
Imagine you are Martin, what would you do when you see Liu Ming?In pairs, read the dialogue on page 45 and discuss the following questions?1Page 45Work in pairs. Each pair should choose one of the following situations and make a dialogue.Your best friend tells you that he/she has stolen something small from a shop. He/She thinks it is funny that he/she got away with it. What will you say to him/her?Situation 12You hate to be late for school but your best friend is so slow that you often arrive at school after the first class has started. You are not pleased but your friend finds it fun. How can you persuade him/her to get to school on time?Situation 2You have been getting on well with your friend for years, but now you don’t like him as much as before. He is crazy about Internet games and he smokes. You tried to stop him doing these things, but he won’t listen. What should you do? Should you end the friendship?Situation 3Writing taskHere you see some proverbs about friends and friendship. Read them carefully and think of some Chinese proverbs that have similar meanings. Choose one and write a short story of explanation about it.When you meet your friend, your face shines – you have found gold
Friends are like wine; the older, the better
A friend to all is a friend to none.
The friendship that can end was never real.能够结束的友谊，不是真正的友谊。
（真正的友谊会天长地久）当你遇见你的好友，你的脸上都是光彩，一如你发现了金子。（朋友是人生的财富）朋友像酒，愈久弥香 滥交则无友 Walking with a friend in the dark is better than walking alone in the light.
Friendship cannot stand always on one side.
With clothes, the new are best; with friends, the old are best.来而不往非礼也衣莫如新，人莫如故 和朋友走在黑暗中要好过一个人独自在光明中行走（ ——[美国] 海伦·凯勒 ）A friend in need is a friend indeed.
The best mirror is an old friend.
The same man cannot be both friend and flatterer.
False friends are worse than open enemies.患难见真情 老朋友是最好的镜子损友恶于明敌 朋友与奉承者不会是同一个人。（真朋友不会总奉承你） structureText type: story (fiction)
Context: who, where, when, whatDevelopment:
not happy when I watched myself on TV
my friend’s phone callConclusion: (using the proverb)
I realized she was right because she told me the truth—so old friends are the best.How to write an argumentative essayHomeworkFinish the Writing task.
Review the language points in this unit.
Preview the new words in next unit.